11+ (11 plus) Essex (CSSE ) Exam – Comprehensive Practice Tests
11+
EXAM PAPERS PLUS BLOG > CATEGORY > 11+
What is Technical English? 11+ GL Assessment English Exam – Grammar Schools and ISEB Pretest
11+
Radley College Common Pre-Tests 11+ Funded Admissions Information
11+
Warwick School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Highgate School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Whitgift School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Headington School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Sir William Perkin’s School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Reigate Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Information
11+
Manchester High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
King Edward’s School Bath 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Abingdon School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Walthamstow Hall 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Trinity School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
The Grange School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
The Abbey School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
St Michael’s School (St Mike’s) 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
St Mary’s Calne 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
St Mary’s Calne is an independent boarding and day school for girls aged 11–18. It is located close to the market town of Calne in the Wiltshire Downs and is a relatively small school with just 360 students, of which approximately 80% are boarders.
St Mary’s was first established in 1873 by the vicar of Calne and takes its name from the local church. The school was originally attended by nine daughters of local tradespeople and farmers, but gradually grew and expanded. The school moved to its current site in 1907 and has acquired more land over the years. It now occupies a 25-acre site, which boasts several impressive new buildings, including a state-of-the-art library and wood-clad sixth form boarding house.
St Mary’s is consistently listed as one of the UK’s top boarding schools for girls in league tables. It is highly academic and particularly strong in science and mathematics. In 2017, the school’s science department was awarded the Platinum Science Mark Award. The award is held by just ten schools in the UK and St Mary’s was the first independent school to receive it.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Mary’s Calne
Address: St Mary’s School, Calne, Wiltshire, SN11 0DF
County: Wiltshire
Admissions info: 01249 857206 or admissions@stmaryscalne.org
School Type: Girls’ independent boarding and day school
Number of Students: 360 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 30 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: ISEB Common Entrance
St Mary’s Calne 11 Plus Admissions Procedures
St Mary’s Calne is extremely popular and the school advises that a girl should be registered for 11+ entry when she turns 8 years old or earlier. The school has fairly rigid entrance procedures and carries out a pre-assessment of all candidates prior to examination.
Parents are expected to make an initial enquiry 3–4 years ahead of entry and, following this, to visit the school and meet with the Head Teacher. They will then be invited to register their daughter by completing a registration form and paying a non-refundable registration fee of £250.
Following registration, parents will be sent confirmation of a reserved place and regular newsletters and details of events being held at school. Please be aware that the reserved place is not a confirmed offer and is subject to assessment and examination.
Girls who have a reserved place will be invited to an informal taster day, usually towards the end of Year 5. They will then be invited to attend an entrance day in September of the year prior to entry, which is when they will be assessed and evaluated by St Mary’s. They are asked to take samples of recent work to the entrance day with them.
Based on performance during the entrance day, offers of places are made subject to achieving satisfactory results at Common Entrance (or in the St Mary’s 11+ examinations).
Some girls may be invited to enter scholarship examinations. To be accepted as a scholarship student, St Mary’s must be the girl’s first choice of school and approval must be given by her current head teacher.
The Common Entrance for 11+ is usually held in the autumn or spring term of Year 6. The 11+ exams (for girls who are not entered for the Common Entrance) and scholarships exams are held in January.
A copy of the St Mary’s Calne admissions policy is available on the school’s website.
The school has a limited number of Foundation (fee-assisted) places available and applications for these should be sent directly to the Head Teacher.
For more information on the entrance procedures for St Mary’s Calne, please contact the admissions department: 01249 857206 or admissions@stmaryscalne.org.
St Mary’s Calne 11 Plus Exam Format
St Mary’s School Calne uses the ISEB (Independent Schools Examinations Board) Common Entrance at 11+, which consists of exams in English, maths and science.
The exams are usually taken at your daughter’s own school in the autumn or spring term of Year 6.
The English exam assesses reading comprehension and composition, including syntax, grammar and punctuation.
The maths exam assesses the skills and knowledge set out on the National Curriculum for Key Stage 2, with a strong focus on the Year 5 and Year 6 Programmes of Study.
The science exam broadly reflects the National Curriculum for Key Stage 2, with an emphasis on ‘Working Scientifically’.
The complete syllabuses for these exams can be found on the ISEB website.
The St Mary’s Calne 11+ examinations, taken by girls who are not entered for the Common Entrance, are likely to reflect the Common Entrance exams in style and content.
How to Prepare for the St Mary’s Calne 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Common Entrance at 11+. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of the Common Entrance at 11+.
To prepare for the Common Entrance English exam, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the Common Entrance maths exam, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers. Please note that some of the questions towards the end of these papers go slightly beyond the ISEB 11+ Maths syllabus.
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about St Mary’s Calne was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Oundle School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Merchant Taylors’ School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Information
11+
Merchant Taylors’ School is located in Northwood, in the London Borough of Hillingdon. Its vast estate consists of over 280-acres, including 100 acres of sports provision, classic Art Deco buildings and a range of contemporary facilities. Despite its rural setting, the school is just half an hour away from the centre of London by tube
Merchant Taylors’ is an independent day school for boys Aged 11–18. It joined with the former Northwood Prep, now Merchant Taylors’ Prep School, in 2015 to provide a ‘through school’ experience from the age of 3. However, transfer from the prep to the senior school is not automatic.
The school takes its name from the Merchant Taylors’ Company, which was responsible for its foundation in 1561 and still acts as its governing body. Originally based in London, the school moved to its current site in 1933.
Merchant Taylors’ School prides itself on tailoring its curriculum to the individual student. Boys joining the school in the Thirds (Year 7) study a broad curriculum of 12 subjects. They then have a choice of 21 subjects at IGCSE / GCSE and 26 subjects at A level.
11 Plus Exam Information for Merchant Taylors’ School
Address: Merchant Taylors’ School, Sandy Lodge, Northwood, Middlesex, HA6 2HT
County: Middlesex
Admissions info: admissions@mtsn.org.uk or 01923 845514
School Type: Boys’ independent day school
Number of Students: 900 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September and May
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Merchant Taylors’ School 11 Plus Admissions
Assessment for entry into the Thirds (Year 7) at Merchant Taylors’ School is based upon a report from the applicant’s current school, entrance exams and an individual interview for those applicants who meet the required standard in the exams.
The entrance exams consist of an English paper, a mathematics paper and a general paper. They are held on the second Tuesday in January of the year of entry.
The individual interview is intended to find out more about each applicant’s interests, personal qualities and aptitudes. Interviews are held in late January / early February.
A limited number of means-tested bursaries are available and at least five significant academic scholarships and two outstanding talent awards are awarded at 11+ based on performance throughout the assessment process. Scholarships are also awarded for sport, drama, DT, art and music.
A copy of the Merchant Taylor’s School Admissions Policy and Procedure can be downloaded from its website.
For further information about the admissions process at Merchant Taylors’ School, please contact the admissions department directly: admissions@mtsn.org.uk or 01923 845514.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Merchant Taylors’ School
Prospective parents are encouraged to visit the school with their son before registering for entry. Open mornings are held in September and May. Places can be reserved via the online booking form. Personal tours may also be arranged via the admissions department: admissions@mtsn.org.uk or 01923 845514.
For their son to be assessed for a place at Merchant Taylors’ School, parents must complete the online registration form on the school’s website. The deadline for registration is at the end of October in the year preceding entry.
To register you will need a digital copy of your son’s birth certificate and passport and a credit card to pay the £100 non-refundable registration fee.
Merchant Taylors’ School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Merchant Taylors’ School entrance exam consists of the following papers:
- English Paper (1 hour) – comprehension and composition
- Mathematics Paper (1 hour) – arithmetic and problem solving
- General Paper.
Until recent years, the school set a verbal reasoning paper. This has now been replaced by the general paper which is designed to test a wider range of skills, including problem solving and creativity.
How to Prepare for the Merchant Taylors’ School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Merchant Taylors’ School entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the Merchant Taylor’s School English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The general paper will contain a range of different question types to test a variety of skills, which are likely to include verbal and non-verbal reasoning. Therefore, to help prepare for the general paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Merchant Taylors’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Royal Grammar School Newcastle 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Newcastle upon Tyne Royal Grammar School (RGS) is an independent day school for boys and girls aged 7–18 years. The school is located in the residential suburb of Jesmond, just north of the city centre.
RGS is the oldest institution of learning in Newcastle, having received its Royal Charter from Queen Elizabeth I and being founded in 1545. It moved to its current site at the beginning of the twentieth century. At the moment, a multi-million pound development project is underway with many new facilities being added, including a state-of-the art library, an IT hub, laboratories and sports halls.
RGS became fully coeducational in 2008 and 43% of the students are girls. The school is proud of its academic achievement, extra-curricular activities and student experience. In 2018, 93.4% of GCSE exam entries achieved grades A*–B, with 90 out of 145 students achieving all A*/A grades. Its extra-curricular programme offers opportunities in a wide range of sport, music, drama, clubs and societies.
11 Plus Information for Royal Grammar School Newcastle
Address: Royal Grammar School. Eskdale Terrace, Newcastle upon Tyne, NE2 4DX
County: Tyne and Wear
Admissions info: 0191 212 8968 or admissions@rgs.newcastle.sch.uk
School Type: Coeducational independent day school
Number of Students: 1300 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 72 (external)
Open Day Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Royal Grammar School Newcastle 11 Plus Admissions
RGS describes its curriculum as ‘fast-paced and challenging’. The school’s examination and selection process is designed to identify students who will cope and thrive under these conditions.
All applicants for entry into Year 7 (11+) must sit papers in English, maths and reasoning. A number of candidates are invited back for a short informal interview to help with the selection process.
The school sends out offers of places at the end of February and holds taster days for successful candidates in early March.
A copy of the RGS Admissions Policy can be downloaded from the school’s website.
For further information about admissions procedures, please contact the admissions office at RGS directly: 0191 212 8968 or admissions@rgs.newcastle.sch.uk.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Royal Grammar School Newcastle
To apply for a place at Royal Grammar School Newcastle, you must complete an online registration form. The deadline for registering your child is in mid-December of the year preceding entry. If you are applying for a bursary, the deadline is earlier (at the end of November). There is no registration fee or charge for sitting the entrance exam at RGS.
The school does not award any scholarships, however a small number of means-tested bursaries are available.
The school holds an annual open day in mid-November, just ahead of the registration deadline. Booking is not required. Individual visits can also be arranged through the Head of Admissions, Ali Perry, on: 0191 212 8968 or admissions@rgs.newcastle.sch.uk.
All registered applicants will be invited to sit the 11+ entrance exam and receive information about the procedures for exam day in due course.
Royal Grammar School Newcastle 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ entry tests for RGS consist of three papers:
- English (50 minutes) – reading comprehension and composition
- Maths (45 minutes) – arithmetic and problem solving
- Reasoning (30 minutes)
On the English paper, there is an emphasis on writing skills – this section of the paper is worth 70% of the total marks. There is a choice of composition tasks, but there may not always be an opportunity to write a piece of fiction.
No calculators are allowed for the maths paper.
The reasoning papers are likely to contain questions that test verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and logic.
How to Prepare for the Royal Grammar School Newcastle 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Royal Grammar School Newcastle 11+ entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the RGS English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Royal Grammar School Newcastle was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Albans School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Assessment Information
11+
Having been established in 948 by Abbot Wulsin, St Albans School has strong links to the Cathedral and Abbey Church of St Alban, known locally as ‘the Abbey’. Since its foundation, the school has gone through many changes, however the links to the Abbey remain strong. The school has occupied its current location in the Abbey Gateway for nearly 150 years and holds assemblies in the cathedral twice a week.
St Albans School is an independent day school for boys aged 11–18 years, with a coeducational sixth form. The school offers a broad academic curriculum offset by a wide range of extra-curricular opportunities. In 2018, 99.4% of GCSE results were grades A* to C (9–4) and 82% were A* to A (9–7).
The school has a Combined Cadet Force, which represents both the Army and RAF and provides military training in areas such as field craft, survival skills and tactics. The RAF cadets gain air experience flying at local RAF bases and work towards their Part One and Part Two certificates.
Competition for places at St Albans School can be fierce at 11+, with on average 300 boys contesting just 72 places.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Albans School
Address: St Albans School, Abbey Gateway, St Albans, Herefordshire, AL3 4HB
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions info: admissions@st-albans.herts.sch.uk or 01727 515182
School Type: Boys independent day school (coeducational sixth form)
Number of Pupils: 860
Number of Places in Year 7: 72
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
St Albans School 11 Plus Admissions
There are two stages to the St Albans selection process. All candidates who register for 11+ entry must sit the school’s own entrance exam, comprising papers in English, maths and verbal reasoning, and attend a short interview with a senior member of staff on the same day. Boys who are successful in this first stage of assessment are notified within one week and invited to a call-back session, where they take part in group activities and a couple of trial lessons.
St Albans School is part of the North London Consortium, so all offers are posted on the Consortium’s agreed date (usually the Thursday before February half term).
The school publishes an Additional Information Booklet, which contains further information about admissions policies and procedures.
There is also an Information Booklet for prospective parents, which provides in-depth information about the programme of education, co-curricular activities and the school in general.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Albans School
To be considered for a place in First Form (Year 7) of the Lower School at St Albans you can register your son at any time up to the end of November in the year preceding entry. To register, you need to complete an online registration form and pay the non-refundable registration fee of £100.
Information about the entrance exam is sent out to all registered candidates in November.
The school holds four open mornings each year and prospective parents are encouraged to visit the school before registering their son. Dates are published on the ‘Admissions’ page of the school’s website. Places, which can be booked through the admissions office: admissions@st-albans.herts.sch.uk or 01727 515182, are often oversubscribed so it is advisable to book as far in advance as possible.
A limited number of means-tested bursaries are available for up to 100% of the fees. The paperwork for bursary applications must be returned by mid-December.
All candidates are automatically considered for academic scholarships, which are awarded based on the results of the entrance assessments.
Choral scholarships can also be applied for at 11+. They are awarded on the basis of an audition and are subject to satisfactory entrance exam results being achieved.
St Albans School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Sat Albans 11+ entrance exam consists of the following papers:
- English: reading comprehension and writing (80 minutes)
- Maths: arithmetic, problem solving and logic (60 minutes)
- Verbal Reasoning (60 minutes).
Calculators are not permitted in the maths exam.
How to Prepare for the St Albans School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the St Albans entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the St Albans English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about St Albans School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Kingston Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Assessment Information
11+
Kingston Grammar School (KGS) is a co-educational independent school for students aged 11–18 years, based in the very heart of Kingston upon Thames. It has a long history, extending back over 450 years, having been officially founded as a free grammar school in 1561 by royal charter of Queen Elizabeth I. The Queen also gifted the school its 14th century Lovekyn Chapel, which takes its name from the prominent local butcher and baker for whom it was originally built.
The school has a strong academic focus and its exam results at GCSE and A-Level place it in the top 1% of UK secondary schools. To add to its academic rigour, alongside traditional subjects, KGS places a lot of weight in extension projects for STEAM (Science, Technology, Engineering, the Arts & Maths). However, the school is also well known for its sporting successes, especially in hockey and rowing – it has produced 26 Olympians and owns a 22-acre sports field, plus boat house, on the River Thames in Thames Ditton, opposite Hampton Court Palace.
11 Plus Exam Information for Kingston Grammar School
Address: Kingston Grammar School, London Road, Kingston upon Thames, KT2 6PY
County: Greater London
Admissions info: registrar@kgs.org.uk or 0208 546 5875
School Type: Co-educational independent day school
Number of Students: 810 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 110 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Kingston Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Kingston Grammar School is academically selective and selection is based upon a report from each candidate’s current school (usually obtained prior to the entrance examinations), entrance exam results and an interview.
The entrance exams consist of papers in English, maths and verbal reasoning, which are produced by the school and generally reflect the National Curriculum for the age group (up to Year 6).
Only candidates who have achieved the required standards in the entrance exam will be invited for interview. The interview may be of a general nature or subject specific (English or maths) depending on performance in the exam.
Potential scholarship students are identified based on performance in the entrance exam and are required to take further assessments in English and maths a week later to aid decision making.
Scholarships can also be applied for in art, music and sport.
A copy of the complete Kingston Grammar School Admissions Policy can be downloaded from the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Kingston Grammar School
Open events are held throughout the year and provide an opportunity for prospective students and their parents to visit Kingston Grammar School. The dates of upcoming open events and group tours are published on the school’s website.
For their child to be considered for 11+ entry into First Form (Year 7) at Kingston Grammar School, parents must complete the registration form and pay the non-refundable registration fee of £125. The deadline for registration and to apply for fee assistance (by completing a separate form) is at the very beginning of December.
The school publishes an Admissions Brochure, which is available for download from its website and covers all the key information, including procedures, scholarships, deadlines and fees.
Kingston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Kingston Grammar School entrance exam consists of English, maths and verbal reasoning papers, which broadly reflect the National Curriculum up to Year 6.
The English paper has three parts based upon a passage of text: multiple-choice comprehension questions, a comprehension question requiring a detailed written response and a writing composition task.
The maths paper tests knowledge, understanding and application of skills in number and algebra, shape, space and measure and handling data. Calculators cannot be used.
Sample questions for English and maths can be found on the website.
Potential scholarship students are identified based on performance in the entrance exam and are required to take further assessments in English and maths a week later. The scholarship papers are more challenging and the maths paper has a strong focus on problem solving.
How to Prepare for the Kingston Grammar School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways to prepare for a competitive entrance exam is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual exam in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Kingston Grammar School entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the Kingston Grammar School English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English Pack 1 (multiple-choice)
11+ English Pack 2 (multiple-choice)
11+ English Pack 3 (multiple-choice)
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about Kingston Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
King’s High 11 Plus (11+) Exam Admissions Information
11+
King’s High School for Girls, known as King’s High, is an independent school for girls aged 11–18. It is part of the Warwick Independent Schools Foundation, along with Warwick Prep and Warwick School. King’s High currently stands alone on Smith Street in Warwick. However, in September 2019 it will move to join the other two schools on their 50-acre campus on Myton Road. Brand new, state-of-the-art facilities are being built on the site to accommodate the school as part of ‘Project One Campus’. These include dedicated educational buildings for King’s High, a sixth form centre to be shared with Warwick School and a high-tech music school.
Kings High has been named The Sunday Times Independent Secondary School of the Year 2019 for the West Midlands. It follows a relatively traditional curriculum, which is enhanced by its ‘Boost’ and ‘Inspire’ programmes, which offer academic support and enrichment. The strong academic focus of King’s High is offset by an offering of over 130 different co-curricular clubs and activities each week.
In terms of performance, in 2018 King’s High ranked 21st nationally of independent girls’ schools and 49th of all independent schools in general, with 74% of GCSE grades awarded to its students being in the top A*–A (9–7) range.
11 Plus Exam Information for King’s High
Address: King’s High School for Girls, Smith Street, Warwick, CV34 4HJ
County: Warwickshire
Admissions info: registrar@kingshighwarwick.co.uk or 01926 735461
School Type: Girls’ independent day school
Number of Pupils: 650 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 100 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout Year
Exam Date: October
Exam Type / Board: School’s Own
King’s High 11 Plus Admissions
King’s High expects all prospective pupils to visit the school and have an informal interview with the head teacher or a senior member of staff during the spring and summer terms of Year 5.
The entrance exam, which takes place in October of the year preceding entry, consists of papers in English, maths and verbal reasoning. A reference from each candidate’s current school will also be taken into consideration during the selection process.
Scholarships and Foundation Awards (means-tested bursaries) are available. All candidates who sit the entrance exam are automatically considered for Academic, English and Mathematics Scholarships. A separate application must be made by parents who wish their daughter to be considered for a scholarship in art, drama, music, DT, sport, gym or dance.
The bursaries available include CV34 Awards, which are covered by funds ring-fenced for local students who live within the CV34 postcode.
Results are sent out within one month of the entrance exam and the deadline for acceptance is in early March.
King’s High runs a programme of special events from December (of the year preceding entry) onwards, which successful candidates are invited to attend to help with the transition process.
For more information about the admissions process at King’s High, including scholarships and bursaries, please contact the Registrar and Head of Admissions Mrs Worrall directly: registrar@kingshighwarwick.co.uk or 01926 735461.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King’s High
It is a compulsory part of the King’s High admissions process that all prospective pupils visit the school and have an informal interview with the head teacher or a senior member of staff. These should be arranged through the Registrar, and it is recommended that they take place when the prospective pupil is still in Year 5, in the spring or summer term.
The school also hosts open evenings and taster mornings for girls in Years 5 and 6. Dates are published on the school’s website and booking can be made via the marketing department: marketing@kingshighwarwick.co.uk.
Parents who wish their daughter to be examined and considered for a place in Year 7 at King’s High must complete the application form for registration and return it to the school along with a copy of their daughter’s birth certificate and the non-refundable registration fee of £75. The deadline for applications is in early September of the year preceding entry, but early registration is recommended. The King’s High Admission Policy is printed on the first page of the application form for reference.
King’s High 11 Plus Exam Format
The King’s High 11+ entrance exam consists of the following papers:
- English (45 minutes): comprehension and creative writing
- Mathematics (45 minutes): arithmetic and problem solving
- Verbal Reasoning (60 minutes).
The topics that will be assessed by the maths paper are published on the school’s website and are aligned with Key Stage 2 National Curriculum.
The 60 minutes allocated to the verbal reasoning paper includes 15 minutes of practice and familiarisation. The school recommends that parents buy verbal reasoning practice papers to help familiarise their daughter with this type of test. Please see below for our recommendations.
How to Prepare for the King’s High 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the King’s High entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the King’s High English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about King’s High was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
City of London Freemen’s School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Assessment Information
11+
Although Freemen’s School is owned by the City of London Corporation, it is located in Ashtead Park in the Surrey Hills. The original school was founded in Brixton in 1854 to provide care and education for orphaned children of Freemen of the City (men and women who had the right to carry out their trade or craft within the Square Mile). It moved out of the city to its current home in 1926.
Since then, the site has been expanded considerable and many new facilities have been added. The most recent development work includes a purpose-built boarding house, a new music school and an award-winning swimming pool.
The school has been fully co-educational since its very beginnings over 160 years ago. A majority of the girls and boys, aged 7 to 18 years, are day students, with just under 10% boarding. 11+ entrance to the school is competitive, with around 150 applicants competing for just 20 places each year.
11 Plus Exam Information for City of London Freemen’s School
Address: City of London Freemen’s School, Ashtead Park, Ashtead, Surrey, KT21 1ET
County: Surrey
Admissions info: 01372 822423 or admissions@freemens.org
School Type: Co-educational independent school (day and boarding)
Number of Pupils: 910 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 20
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: November
Exam Type / Board: BUSSATs
City of London Freemen’s School 11 Plus Admissions
Freemen’s School is academically selective. However, they state that they are looking for ‘well-rounded pupils with a genuine interest in education in the broadest sense of the word’. The school’s admissions process supports this, combining competitive entrance exams with interviews designed to find out about candidates’ character and interests.
The assessment process for Freemen’s School has recently changed. Now, at 11+, all candidates take online assessments (BUSSATs) in English, mathematics and general knowledge, plus a non-verbal reasoning assessment and short written paper in English, in November of Year 6.
A confidential report from the head teacher of the candidate’s current school will also be requested. This covers academic ability and other interests and aptitudes, as well as attitude and behaviour.
Interviews are an important of the admissions process and most candidates will be invited to attend an interview day in January based on the results of the entrance exams and the report from their current school. Interview days comprise of a half-hour group interview and half-hour individual interview, plus other activities.
Letters about the school’s decision are sent out in the first week of February and acceptances must be made within one calendar month.
The school publishes a list of FAQs regarding admissions and assessments on its website and a copy of the Freemen’s School complete Admissions Policy can also be downloaded.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to City of London Freemen’s School
Freemen’s School encourages prospective parents and pupils to visit the school before registering for a place. They hold a number of open events throughout the year. Some are whole school events, while others are aimed at a specific intake. Details are published on the school’s website along with an online attendance request form. Personal visits can also be arranged for other times via the Admissions Team: 01372 822423 or admissions@freemens.org.
Parents who want their child to be considered for a Upper 3 (Year 7) place at Freemen’s School, must complete a registration form, which can be completed online or downloaded, and pay a non-refundable registration fee of £100.00 (£150.00 for overseas applicants). The deadline for registration is 15 October in the year prior to entry. All candidates registered by the published deadline will be examined and assessed for entrance.
Academic scholarships are available at 11+ and are awarded on the basis of the entrance assessments (there is no separate application). Scholarships take the form of a nominal financial reduction on fees, the main reward being acceptance into an enrichment programme. Music scholarships are also available. These must be applied for separately and are awarded based on performance in an audition and interview.
Please contact the Outreach and Partnerships Officer for information about means-tested bursaries: kerri.martin@freemens.org.
City of London Freemen’s School 11 Plus Exam Format
The entrance exam for 11+ entry into Upper 3 at Freemen’s School comprises:
- Online BUSSATs assessments in English, mathematics and general knowledge (2 hours)
- Non-verbal reasoning assessment (40 minutes)
- English writing task (30 minutes).
BUSSATs (British Universities & Secondary Schools Achievement Tests) are designed to assess academic ability against the school’s own benchmark – a unique academic performance index (API) based on the performance of a control group of existing students – to find pupils who are a good match to the school.
The online assessment will consist of multiple-choice questions that test reading comprehension, punctuation, vocabulary (word meaning), maths (knowledge, understanding and application of number and calculation, shape and data skills) and general knowledge. Some example questions are published on the school’s website.
How to Prepare for the City of London Freemen’s School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for a competitive entrance exam is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual exam in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Freemen’s School exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the online assessment (BUSSATs), we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve reading comprehension, punctuation, spelling and vocabulary and maths skills:
To prepare for the non-verbal reasoning assessment, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
To prepare for the English writing task, we would highly recommend using the following resource:
The information provided about City of London Freemen’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Ibstock Place School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Ibstock Place School is a coeducational independent school for children aged 4–18, made up of a prep school and senior school. It is located on the edge of Richmond Park – a National Nature Reserve and a European Special Area of Conservation – in Roehampton, South West London.
The school first opened in 1896 as a demonstration school for a teacher training college, which was established upon the educational principles of Freidrich Froebel . Froebel’s ideas were considered radical at the time, because of the emphasis they placed on the learning experiences of young children, but both the college and school proved to be very successful.
The school was originally located in Kensington but had to be evacuated to Hertfordshire at the start of World War II. When the school returned to London, it was re-housed at Ibstock Place in Roehampton. The school remains on this site today but is now independent of the Froebel Trust.
The stylish ‘Main House’ of Ibstock Place was built as a luxury home in 1913 and featured in Country Life magazine in 1921. Since then, much renovation and building work has taken place to expand and modernise the school facilities. A 10-year School Development Plan was completed in 2015, which included a sports hall, ‘New School’ and performing arts centre.
The school states that it is committed to providing a ‘liberal and humane education.’ It offers a broad, flexible and challenging academic curriculum with a strong focus on traditional academic subjects. In 2018, 84% of its GCSE grades were A*–A.
11 Plus Information for Ibstock Place School
Address: Ibstock Place School, Clarence Lane, Roehampton, London, SW15 5PY
County: Greater London
Admissions info: registrar@ibstockplaceschool.co.uk or 020 8392 5803
School Type: Coeducational independent day school
Number of Pupils: 960 (approx.)
Open Day Date: May / September
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own and CEM Select
Ibstock Place School 11 Plus Admissions
There are two stages to the Ibstock Place School admissions process. All registered candidates are invited for an individual interview with a member of staff and a computer-based test in early January. A written entrance exam is then held in late January, which consists of papers in English, maths and reasoning.
Offers are made approximately two weeks after the entrance exam and the deadline for acceptance is at the beginning of March.
There is no automatic entry to the senior school from the prep school. All internal candidates go through the same assessment process as external candidates.
A limited number of means-tested bursaries are available and the Richard Hastie-Smith Music Awards, which run for two years, are open to candidates applying for 11+ entry. Application forms may be obtained from the Registrar: registrar@ibstockplaceschool.co.uk or 020 8392 5803.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Ibstock Place School
Ibstock Place School holds open events in May and September for prospective pupils considering entry to the senior school and their parents. Booking for one of the open events can be made via an online booking form on the school’s website.
For their child to be considered and assessed for a place in Senior 7 (Year 7), parents must complete the Ibstock Place Registration Form and an Examination Entry Form (available on request from the Registrar). There is a non-refundable registration fee of £150. The deadline for both forms is in November, but early registration is recommended.
The school publishes an Admissions Guide, which is available for download from its website and provides a good overview of the application process.
Ibstock Place School 11 Plus Assessment and Exam Format
The first part of the Ibstock Place assessment process is a computer-based test. This is likely to include multiple-choice questions that assess verbal, non-verbal and numerical reasoning skills as a measure of academic potential.
The written entrance exam consists of papers in:
- English
- Mathematics
- Reasoning (verbal and non-verbal).
The papers are set and marked by the school and are based on the National Curriculum for Key Stage 2. The school does not publish any past papers.
How to Prepare for the Ibstock Place School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Ibstock Place School computer-based assessment and written entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and question formats and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the computer-based assessment, which will have been provided by CEM (the Centre for Evaluating and Monitoring), we highly recommend using the following practice papers that are designed to familiarise students with the specific question formats that appear in such tests, provide invaluable, focused practice in answering them, and help build confidence:
Verbal Reasoning (English) – Specific Skill Development:
11 Plus CEM Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus CEM Comprehension (Non-fiction)
11 Plus CEM Shuffled Sentences
11 Plus CEM Synonyms and Antonyms Pack 1
11 Plus CEM Synonyms and Antonyms Pack 2
Numerical Reasoning (Maths) – Specific Skill Development:
11 Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
Full Practice Tests – Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Reasoning:
To prepare for the Ibstock School written English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the written maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the written reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Ibstock School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
The King’s School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Admissions and Entrance Exam Information
11+
The King’s School is an independent day school for children aged 4–18 situated in the city of Chester. It has been fully coeducational since 2004 and just over 35% of its pupils are girls. The school is made up of an infant school (Ages 4–7), junior school (Ages 7–11), senior school (Ages 11–16) and sixth form (Ages 16–18).
The King’s School is so named because it was founded by King Henry VIII in 1542. Originally housed in the refectory of the former St Werburgh’s Abbey, which became Chester Cathedral, the school occupied several different premises before moving to its current 33-acre greenbelt site, on Wrexham Road on the outskirts of Chester, in 1960.
Since then, the original school buildings that were erected in the 1950s have been developed and extended and the school’s extensive facilities now include a swimming pool, theatre, all-weather pitch, sports hall, ten sports pitches and a rowing club (located on the River Dee).
The King’s School focuses on academic excellence and it is the top performing school in Cheshire. In 2018, 91% of GCSE entries were graded in the A*–B range. Alongside its broad curriculum, the school runs an ‘Enrichment Programme’, which allows students to deepen their understanding and explore beyond the traditional core subjects, and a ‘Learning to Learn’ programme, which ensures students are equipped with the study and revision skills they need to succeed.
The academic curriculum at The King’s School is complemented by over 130 clubs and activities providing access to a wide range of sports, musical interests and other extra-curricular activities.
11 Plus Exam Information for The King’s School
Address: The King’s School, Wrexham Road, Chester, CH4 7QL
County: Cheshire
Admissions info: admissions@kingschester.co.uk or 01244 689553
School Type: Coeducational independent day school
Number of Pupils: 1100 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 104 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
The King’s School 11 Plus Admissions
Each year there are around 104 places available in Removes (Year 7) at The King’s School. However, up to 65% of these are offered as unconditional places to pupils at the junior school, leaving as few as 36 places available to external applicants.
For external applicants, admission into Removes is based on a competitive entrance exam, an interview with a senior member of staff and a reference from the applicant’s current school. The entrance exam, which takes place in January of the year of entry, consists of papers in English, maths, verbal reasoning and non-verbal reasoning.
A copy of The King’s School Admissions Policy (including appeals) can be downloaded from the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The King’s School
The King’s School holds several open events throughout the year. Details these events, including how to register for attendance, are published on the school’s website when they become available. Taster days for prospective students and individual visits can be arranged through the admissions office: admissions@kingschester.co.uk or 01244 689553.
King’s publishes a five-step guide to its admissions process, which can be downloaded from the admissions page of the school’s website.
The process starts by completing an online registration form and the non-refundable registration fee of £50. Applications close one week before the entrance exam.
A limited number of means-tested bursaries are available to external 11+ applicants. However, the school’s development strategy includes steps to increase bursary provision significantly over the coming years.
The King’s School 11 Plus Exam Format
The King’s School entrance exam consists of four papers:
- English (60 minutes): reading comprehension and writing
- Mathematics (45 minutes): arithmetic and problem solving
- Verbal Reasoning
- Non-Verbal Reasoning.
The questions are broadly based on the Key Stage 2 National Curriculum, with a few more challenging questions.
How to Prepare for The King’s School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for The King’s School entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for The King’s School English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
To prepare for the non-verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about The King’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
11+ Sutton & Kingston: Prefixes and Suffixes – LEARN MORE
11+
Epsom College 11 Plus (11+) Exam Admissions Information
11+
Epsom College is an independent day and boarding school for students aged 11–18. It is situated in the market town of Epsom in Surrey, on the beautiful Epsom Downs, approximately 15 miles south-west of London. The college has been fully coeducational for over 40 years. However, as part of its pastoral care programme, each student is assigned to a single-sex house on joining the college.
Epsom College began life in 1855 as The Royal Medical Benevolent College, which was founded to provide housing and education to the orphans of medical families. The Royal Medical Foundation is still based at the college and continues to support medical families today.
The Lower School (Years 7 and 8) at Epsom College is still relatively new, having only been open since 2016. It follows a broad curriculum with a strong focus on equipping students with learning skills that will benefit them throughout their career at Epsom and beyond. Co-curricular activities are timetabled from 4 p.m. onwards each day. The college offers over 100 clubs and activities, including over 22 sports, which are catered for in excellent specialist facilities on the 85-acre campus.
In 2018, 77% of all Epsom College GCSE grades were in the 9–7 (A*–A range), placing it at number 20 in The Times’ GCSE rankings for coeducational independent schools.
11 Plus Exam Information for Epsom College
Address: Epsom College, College Road, Epsom, Surrey, KT17 4JQ
County: Surrey
Admissions info: admissions@epsomcollege.org.uk or 01372 821234
School Type: Coeducational independent boarding and day school
Number of Students: 900 (approx.)
Open Day Date: October and March
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s Own
Epsom College 11 Plus Admissions
Epsom College has a strong academic focus. However, it states that it is looking for ‘well-rounded’ students and that its admissions process is designed to assess potential.
Offers of places in the Third Form (Year 7) at Epsom College are made based on an interview, a competitive entrance exam and a reference from the candidate’s current school.
Interviews are in the autumn term preceding the exam and are carried out by the Head of Lower School or a senior member of staff. The entrance exam takes place in January and consists of tests in English, maths and verbal reasoning.
Offers of places are sent out at the beginning of February and a decision is required by early March.
A copy of the Epsom College Admissions Policy can be downloaded from the college’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Epsom College
The college recommends that all prospective families make a personal visit prior to registration. It holds two open mornings, in October and March, plus some smaller ‘Discover Epsom’ mornings throughout the school year. Details of the open events, including online booking forms, can be found on the college’s website. Individual tours can be arranged through the Admissions Registrar: lynn.watkins@epsomcollege.org.uk or 01372 821007.
Parent’s wishing their child to be considered for a place in Third Form (Year 7) at Epsom College must complete and return a registration form, which can be downloaded from the college’s website. A non-refundable registration fee of £100 (£150 for overseas applicants) is required at the time of registration. The deadline for registration is at the end of October in the year preceding entry (whilst the child is in Year 6).
Scholarships and bursaries are available. All candidates entering into the admissions assessment process are automatically considered for an academic scholarship and there are no separate exams. A separate assessment is required for sports and arts scholarships. Application forms for these scholarships are sent out to all registered candidates.
Bursary funds are limited, so parents interested in financial assistance are encouraged to apply 6–12 months ahead of enrolment. Details of bursaries and additional sources of financial support can be found on a dedicated section of the college’s website.
For further information on admissions, applications and financial assistance, please contact the admissions department at Epsom College directly: admissions@epsomcollege.org.uk or 01372 821234.
Epsom College 11 Plus Exam Format
The Epsom College entrance exam consists of three papers:
- English:
- Part A (20 minutes): reading comprehension, spelling and grammar
- Part B (25 minutes): writing
- Mathematics (45 minutes): arithmetic and problem solving
- Verbal Reasoning.
How to Prepare for the Epsom College 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Epsom College entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the Epsom College English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about Epsom College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
City of London School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
City of London School (CLS), situated close to St Paul’s Cathedral in the heart of the City of London, is an independent day school for boys aged 10 to 18 years.
The school was originally founded in 1442 to provide an education for children living in poverty. Today, the contemporary independent school supports students from all backgrounds with around 10% of places being funded by means-tested bursaries.
The school is one of the three independent schools owned by the City of London Corporation, the governing body of the City of London. Under its management, the first purpose-built school was opened in 1837 and was considered radical in its approach, not only to the curriculum, but by allowing students of various religions to enter. Today, the school remains socially, culturally and religiously diverse, reflecting its foundations and the city that surrounds it.
The school has a rigorous academic curriculum and encourages participation in internal and national competitions, such as the Olympiad competitions for maths and the sciences. It also offers the Pre-U as an alternative to A-levels in some subjects when boys reach the sixth form. However, the strong academic element is offset by a broad range of co-curricular activities and opportunities.
11 Plus Exam Information for City of London School
Address: City of London School, Queen Victoria Street, London, EC4V 3AL
County: Greater London
Admissions info: admissions@cityoflondonschool.org.uk or 020 3680 6300
School Type: Boys’ independent day school
Number of Students: 940 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 60 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
City of London School 11 Plus Admissions
For 11+ entry into First Form (Year 7) at City of London School, boys must be aged between 11 and 12 on 1 September of the year of entry.
The first stage of selection is an entrance exam, held in January of the year of entry, which all candidates must sit. The exam consists of papers in English, maths and reasoning.
Based on performance in the exam, some candidates will be invited for an individual interview, which lasts just over quarter of an hour, and a group session. The purpose of the interview and group session is to explore each candidate’s personal qualities and interests.
A report from the head teacher of the candidate’s current school will also be requested to help with the selection process.
Candidates applying for a means-tested bursary to cover 50%+ of their fees are required to take a computerised reasoning test in the December before the main entrance exam. Only candidates who are successful in this qualifying test will go on to take the main 11+ entrance exam.
A copy of the CLS Admissions Policy can be downloaded for the school’s website.
For further information about admissions procedures and testing, please contact the school directly: admissions@cityoflondonschool.org.uk or 020 3680 6300.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to City of London School
The school holds two open events in late September each year for prospective students and their parents. The dates are confirmed around Easter and bookings can be made via the website. These events provide an opportunity to see the school in operation prior to registration.
To be considered for a place in the First Form (year 7) at City of London School, parents must register their son online. There is a non-refundable registration fee of £160. Registration runs from early in the year prior to entry until mid-November. Exact dates are published on the school’s website once confirmed.
Details of the school’s bursary scheme can also be found on its website. Candidates applying for a means-tested bursary to cover 50% or more of their fees are required to take a computerised reasoning test in the December before the main entrance exam.
City of London School 11 Plus Exam Format
The City of London School entrance exam consists of papers in:
- English (1 hour) – reading comprehension (multiple choice) and creative writing
- Mathematics (1 hour) – arithmetic and problem solving
- Reasoning – verbal and non-verbal reasoning
How to Prepare for the City of London School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the City of London School entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the City of London School English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about City of London School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Exeter School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Admission Information
11+
Exeter School is an independent day school for children aged 7–18 located in the cathedral city of Exeter, which is the administrative centre for Devon. The school, which has been fully coeducational since 1997, was named ‘South-West Independent School of the Year 2018’ by The Sunday Times.
Exeter School started life in 1633 as the Exeter Free Grammar School. It has stood on its current 25-acre site since 1880 and many of its impressive red-brick buildings date back to that period.
In 2018, 98.6% of GCSE grades achieved by Exeter School entrants were A*–C and 74.9% were in the top A*–A range. The school states that its aim is ‘to realise the academic, personal and physical potential of each pupil.’ To this end, its broad and challenging curriculum is supplemented by many additional opportunities for academic development, including lectures and masterclasses. It is complemented by a wide range of extra-curricular activities, including 25 different sports, which are supported by excellent facilities.
11 Plus Information for Exeter School
Address: Exeter School, Victoria Park Road, Exeter, Devon, EX2 4NS
County: Devon
Admissions info: admissions@exeterschool.org.uk or 01392 498 144
School Type: Coeducational independent day school
Number of Pupils: 920 (approx.)
Open Day Date: July / September
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own and CEM Select
Exeter School 11 Plus Admissions
Exeter School is academically selective and looks for pupils from the local area who have broad academic potential. Places are offered based on a report from the candidate’s current school and their performance in an entrance exam and interview.
The entrance exam is usually held in January and consists of written papers in English and maths, plus a computer-based assessment that tests English, maths and non-verbal reasoning skills.
All pupils must live in the local area at the time of application and for the duration of their time at the school.
A limited number of bursaries are available and are means-tested each year. Application forms are available from the Registrar: admissions@exeterschool.org.uk or 01392 498 144.
Entrance scholarships and exhibitions are awarded to top performers in the entrance exams.
A copy of Exeter School’s full Admissions Policy can be viewed on its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Exeter School
Parents of prospective pupils should address an initial enquiry to the Registrar’s Office at Exeter School. This can be made via the online prospectus request form or by post. The school will then send out an information pack, which includes a prospectus and information about registration, bursaries and scholarships.
Exeter School holds a number of events throughout the year for prospective pupils and their parents. These include two open evenings – in July and September – and a taster morning for 10–11 year olds in November. No reservations are required for the open evenings, but booking is required for the taster morning and can be made via the ‘Visiting the school’ page on the school’s website.
To be eligible for the entrance exam and considered for a place at Exeter School, parents must register their child. The registration form is included in the prospectus or can be downloaded from the school’s website. The completed form must be returned to the school by the registration deadline at the very beginning of December, along with a passport-sized photograph and a non-refundable registration fee of £100.
Exeter School 11 Plus Exam Format
The entrance exam for Exeter School consists of two written papers and a computer-based assessment:
- English Paper – reading comprehension and creative writing
- Mathematics Paper – arithmetic and problem solving
- Computer-Based Assessment – English, maths and non-verbal reasoning.
The questions in the computer-based assessment will include multiple-choice, drag and drop and complete the word formats. It measures verbal, non-verbal and numerical reasoning skills and is designed to allow candidates to demonstrate their academic potential.
How to Prepare for the Exeter School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Exeter School entrance exam written papers and computer-based assessment. They cover all the key skills and question types and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the Exeter School written English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths written paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the computer-based assessment, which will have been supplied by CEM (the Centre for Evaluating and Monitoring), we highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will familiarise students with the specific question formats that appear in such tests and provide invaluable practice in answering them:
Verbal Reasoning (English) – Specific Skill Development:
11 Plus CEM Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus CEM Comprehension (Non-fiction)
11 Plus CEM Shuffled Sentences
11 Plus CEM Synonyms and Antonyms Pack 1
11 Plus CEM Synonyms and Antonyms Pack 2
Numerical Reasoning (Maths) – Specific Skill Development:
11 Plus CEM Short Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Long Numerical Reasoning
11 Plus CEM Multiple Choice Numerical Reasoning
Full Practice Tests – Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Reasoning:
The information provided about Exeter School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Badminton School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Admissions and Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Badminton School is an independent day and boarding school for girls ages 3–18 located in Bristol in South West England. Badminton is made up of a junior school and senior school, but it is not a ‘through’ school – junior school girls must achieve the required results in the entrance exam to gain a place in the senior school. Badminton is not a particularly big school, with just over 300 girls in the senior school, of whom 60% are boarders. Class sizes are small, with no more than 18 girls per class.
Badminton School was founded in 1858 to provide girls with the same educational opportunities as their male counterparts. From the very start it was an international school, welcoming boarders whose parents lived abroad, and offered a broad curriculum (including many subjects that were traditionally deemed unnecessary for girls).
The school takes its name from Badminton House in Clifton, where the school was first based. It moved to its present site in Westbury-on-Trym, a suburb of Bristol, in 1924.
Badminton School states that it offers ‘a bespoke education for each girl with an emphasis on holistic learning’. Its aim is to deliver teaching and learning in ways that are challenging and fun, with an emphasis on skills development to support independent learning. The school consistently achieves high exam results and 96.1% of all GCSE grades awarded to Badminton girls in 2018 were Grades A*–B (or equivalent).
Badminton alumni include the first female Prime Minister of India Indira Gandhi, award-winning actress Rosamund Pike, and philosopher and Booker Prize-winning author Iris Murdoch.
11 Plus Exam Information for Badminton School
Address: Badminton School, Westbury Road, Westbury-on-Trym, Bristol, BS9 3BA
County: Bristol
Admissions info: admissions@badmintonschool.co.uk or 0117 905 5271
School Type: Girls’ independent day and boarding school
Number of Pupils: 300 in senior school (approx.)
Open Day Date: March
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Badminton School 11 Plus Admissions
Entry to Year 7 of Badminton School is always oversubscribed and, therefore, competitive.
Offers of places are made based on a reference from the candidate’s current school, performance in the entrance exam and an interview with a senior member of staff.
The 11+ entrance exam takes place in January. They consist of written examinations in English and maths, plus an online cognitive abilities test.
In the event that the school has to choose between two or more candidates, certain ‘preference factors’ will be taken into consideration, including whether the candidate:
- has a sister or close relative who is a current or former pupil at the school
- has any specific talents or aptitudes
- has visited the school
- has identified Badminton as her first choice of school.
A copy of the Badminton School Admissions Policy can be downloaded from the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Badminton School
Badminton School’s recommended process for applications starts with requesting a prospectus and arranging a visit to the school. A senior school open event is held in March and places can be booked online. Individual visits or Skype meetings (for international prospective parents) can be arranged through the admissions department: admissions@badmintonschool.co.uk or 0117 905 5271.
If parents decide to apply for a place in Year 7 at Badminton for their daughter, they must complete the online registration form and pay a non-refundable registration fee of £50 for day girls and £150 for boarders. The deadline for registration is in December of the year preceding entry.
The entrance exam and assessment take place in January and results are sent out at the very beginning of February.
Academic, music, STEM, sports and all-round scholarships worth either 5% or 10% remission on fees are awarded to successful applicants entering Year 7. Application forms and details of how scholarships are assessed can be obtained from the admissions department: admissions@badmintonschool.co.uk.
Means-tested bursaries are also available. A copy of the bursary application form can be downloaded from the ‘Scholarships, Awards & Bursaries’ page of the school’s website.
Badminton School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ entrance examination for Badminton School has three components:
- English written paper
- Mathematics written paper
- Online cognitive abilities test.
The cognitive abilities test (CAT) is used by schools to assess pupils’ developed abilities and likely academic potential. It is a computer-based test that consists of different types of multiple-choice question, which assess verbal, non-verbal, quantitative and spatial reasoning skills.
How to Prepare for the Badminton School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Badminton School entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the Badminton School English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the cognitive ability test (CAT), we would highly recommend using the following practice tests available on our sister site, Pretest Plus. These are designed to familiarise students with the online format, style and content of this multiple-choice test:
All our CAT practice tests are pitched at the same level of difficulty, to reflect the actual test, but contain unique content to expose students to as many different question types as possible, build confidence and improve performance. Solutions and ranking statistics are provided on completion.
The information provided about Badminton School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Eltham College 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Eltham College is situated on a 65-acre estate in Mottingham, south east London, where it has been based since the early 20th century.
Founded in 1842, Eltham College has recently celebrated its 175th anniversary. The college has acknowledged this milestone by putting in place plans for some significant changes in the near future.
At present, Eltham College is an independent day school for boys aged 7 to 18 years, with girls only being accepted into the sixth form (from age 16). However, from September 2020, the college will start to accept girls into Years 3 and 7, with a view to becoming fully co-educational over the following four years.
In addition to its plans to become fully co-educational, the college is also investing heavily in facilities. Planned new additions include the Turberville Building, which will house new teaching spaces for mathematics and modern languages and a sixth form centre, a medical pavilion and extensive new sports facilities.
11 Plus Exam Information for Eltham College
Address: Eltham College, Grove Park Road, Mottingham, London, SE9 4QF
County: Greater London
Admissions info: registrar@eltham-college.org.uk or 020 8857 1455
School Type: Boys’ independent day school (fully co-educational from 2020)
Number of Students: 900 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Eltham College 11 Plus Admissions
Eltham College holds several open days and visitor mornings throughout the year. Dates are published on the website when available. Individual tours can also be arranged via the Registrar: registrar@eltham-college.org.uk or 020 8857 1455.
The college holds an assessment day in early January of the year of entry. During the assessment day, all candidates will sit entrance papers in English and maths and take a computer-adaptive assessment in verbal and non-verbal reasoning. They will also be interviewed.
A written reference will be requested from each applicant’s current school ahead of the assessment day.
A significant number of registered candidates are also invited to attend an afternoon of lessons on a separate date (late December / early January), which allows both parties to assess how well-suited the candidate will be to the college’s particular style of education.
Offers if places are mailed out to parents in early February and acceptance is required by the beginning of March.
A copy of the full Eltham College Admissions Policy can be downloaded from the website.
For further information about admissions and the assessment process, please contact the college directly: registrar@eltham-college.org.uk or 020 8857 1455.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Eltham College
For your child to be assessed for a Year 7 place at Eltham College, you must complete the online registration form. The online registration process includes payment of a £100 non-refundable application fee.
Registration can be completed at any time, but the deadline is in mid-November of the year prior to entry (when your child is in Year 6).
To complete your application, you will need to email the Registrar copies of your child’s birth certificate, passport and their last two school reports.
All registered applicants will be sent details of the college’s assessment day in due course.
Scholarships and means-tested bursaries are available. All candidates taking the entrance exam are automatically considered for an academic scholarship.
Eltham College 11 Plus Exam Format
All 11+ applicants to Eltham College will sit entrance papers in English and maths.
The English paper is 45 minutes long and includes comprehension and analysis questions based on a passage of text, as well as a creative writing task.
The maths paper is 45 minutes long and comprises a multiple-choice section, plus some longer problem solving questions that require a full written response.
Candidates also take a computer-adaptive assessment in verbal and non-verbal reasoning.
How to Prepare for the Eltham College 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students to familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Eltham College entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance exam. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of such an exam.
To prepare for the Eltham College English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
Multiple-Choice questions
Open Answer questions
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal and non-verbal reasoning test, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Eltham College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Henrietta Barnett School (HBS) switches to GL Assessment for first round 11 plus exam
11+
CEM to be bought by Cambridge University Press – News
11+
South West Hertfordshire (SW Herts) Consortium switches to GL Assessment for VR
11+
Wellington College Belfast PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Wellington College Belfast (WCB) was established in 1989 after Annadale Boys School and Carolan Girls School merged. The College is named after the first Duke of Wellington and is co-educational.
Wellington offers students a wide range of academic subjects, alongside various extracurricular pursuits including art, drama and music. WCB has high expectations of its pupils and promotes a competitive spirit as part of its wider values.
To learn more about Wellington College Belfast, watch this short promotional video:
Transfer Test Information for Wellington College, Belfast
Address: Wellington College, 18 Carolan Road, Belfast, BT7 3HE
Admissions Info: info@wellington.belfast.ni.sch.uk, 02890 642 539
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 770 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 110 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Wellington College Belfast Admissions
When the previous eleven plus process was abolished without a replacement, 34 schools joined together to form the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
WCB is a member of the PPTC and so admission to the school is determined by student performance in the Transfer Test. The school regularly reports to be oversubscribed at Year 8, so where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who at the date of their application have a child of the family currently enrolled at the College
- Applicants who are the eldest or only child of the family to be eligible for admission
- Applicants who have a brother or sister initially selected under the transfer procedure Applicants who are entitled to Free School Meals.
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at WCB, email the school, info@wellington.belfast.ni.sch.uk or call 02890 642 539.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Wellington College Belfast
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Wellington College Belfast, parents are advised to attend the school’s open event, usually held in January. The school’s Principal gives a presentation and parents will have the opportunity to learn more about the College’s admissions process.
To register for a Year 8 place at WCB, parents need to complete the registration form on the PPTC website. Students only need to be registered for the test once, as each school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment.
Wellington College Belfast Transfer Test Format
The Wellington College Transfer Test is set by the exam board, GL Assessment. All children will sit two test papers in maths and English. Questions on both papers are multiple-choice and students will be given practice sections before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
Maths Paper
The maths paper is made up of 45 questions and lasts for 45 minutes. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum and pupils will also be tested on some elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties or geometric names. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper is made up of 60 questions and lasts for 50 minutes. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions, which make up 60% of the total mark. This is then followed by spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions, making up the remaining 40% of the total mark.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
Get further information on the content of the test papers via the PPTC’s website. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Wellington College Belfast 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
A revision plan is key to success for the Transfer Test and should be implemented well ahead of exam day. To prepare for the test, students should make use practice test papers. The Transfer Test requires pupils to answer questions quickly, within the allocated time. Our 11 Plus practice tests are ideal for improving a student’s time management skills. They also provide students with an insight into the types of questions they could be asked in the exam.
To gives students the best chance of gaining a Year 8 place at Wellington College Belfast, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Wellington College Belfast was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Victoria College, Belfast PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Victoria College is a non-denominational independent grammar school in Belfast for girls aged 11 – 18. The school was founded in 1859 and was given specialist status in STEM-related subjects in 2009.
The school educates approximately 900 girls, who are divided into six houses – Crescent, Howard, Marlborough, Pakenham, Richmond and Wellington. Each house participates in various competitive activities throughout each school year. The College places great emphasis on providing high quality extracurricular activities for its students. Part of the school’s ethos is that through extracurricular activities, students develop their personal skills and challenge themselves with new experiences.
For an insight into life at Victoria College, watch this short promotional video:
Transfer Test Information for Victoria College
Address: Victoria College, 2A Cranmore Park, Belfast, BT9 6JA
Admissions Info: nmawhinney170@victoriacollege.belfast.ni.sch.uk, 02890 661 506
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 870 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 130 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Victoria College Admissions
There are currently 34 schools that make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to Victoria College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who attend the Preparatory School of the College
- Sister of the applicant attends or has attended Victoria College
- Applicant is the eldest girl in the family eligible to attend a mainstream post-primary school
- Sister of the applicant is accepted for the secondary department of the College for the forthcoming academic year
- Brother of the applicant attends RBAI or other single sex school
- Applicant is entitled to Free School Meals
- Applicant attends a recognised feeder primary school
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Victoria College, call the school directly on 02890 661 506.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Victoria College
Prospective pupils and their parents are invited to the College’s Open Day, which usually takes place in January. Visitors will be addressed by the Principal and there will be opportunities to take a tour of the school. Alternatively, visitors are welcome to the school by appointment at other times. It is advised that parents visit the school prior to applying for the Year 8 place for their daughter.
To apply for a place at Victoria College, parents need to register their child via the form on the school’s website. Only one application is required, as every school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment. The College’s website has lots of helpful information to ensure ease of application.
Victoria College Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment is the exam board that sets the Victoria College Transfer Test. Students are required to sit two test papers; one in English and one in maths. Both papers contain multiple-choice questions and students will have the chance to complete practice sections before the main assessments begin.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. While many of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, there will be some additional questions centred on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties and geometric names. Going into the assessment, pupils should have a knowledge of mathematical concepts and processes, as well as an ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the College’s website.
How to Prepare for the Victoria College 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
For many children, the PPTC Transfer Test will be their first experience of studying for an important exam.
To ensure stress levels are kept to a minimum, parents can help by creating a structured study plan that covers all the essential areas and accounts for time off. We’d also suggest that parents introduce 11+ practice tests into their child’s revision early on to improve their exam technique. Students should aim to complete these tests under timed conditions to get used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.
For the Victoria College, Belfast PPTC Transfer Test, we specifically recommend the following practice resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Victoria College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Thornhill College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Located in Derry, Thornhill College is a girls-only Catholic grammar school that was founded in 1886 by the Sisters of Mercy. The school was handed over to the Bishop and the Diocese of Derry in 2004, after the school expanded to a new site.
In 2009, Thornhill College became a Specialist School in Mathematics and Physics. Part of the school’s mission is to provide a broad, but challenging curriculum within a stimulating learning environment.
Transfer Test Information for Thornhill College
Address: Thornhill College, Culmore Road, Derry, BT48 8JF
Admissions Info: info@thornhill.derry.ni.sch.uk, 02871 355 800
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1400 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 200 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Thornhill College Admissions
Since the Northern Ireland Assembly abolished the previous eleven plus process, a number of post primary schools have continued to use a selective admission policy. At present, 34 schools have joined the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), including Thornhill College. Each of the schools in the PPTC use the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to Thornhill College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who have a sister, half-sister, step-sister or legally adopted sister currently enrolled in the College or who will be in the coming year
- Applicants who are the first girl in the family to transfer to second level education
- Applicants who are registered for entitlement to Free School Meals
- Other applicants ranked by date of birth – eldest first.
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Thornhill College, parents can contact the school at info@thornhill.derry.ni.sch.uk, or on 02871 355 800.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Thornhill College
Towards the end of January each year, Thornhill College hosts its Open Event for parents and students in Primary 6 or 7. The event is the ideal opportunity to learn more about the school’s curriculum and admissions policy.
Each school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment, so parents are only required to register their child for the test once. Parents can apply using the registration form on the PPTC website. The PPTC also has publishes guidance notes to assist parents in completing the form.
Thornhill College Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment sets both test papers for the Thornhill College Transfer Test – one in English and one in Maths. In both papers, all questions are multiple-choice and each assessment paper has an assessment booklet, containing any reading passages and questions, and a separate answer sheet. Children will also be given the opportunity to do some practice questions before each marked test.
English Paper
The English assessment paper requires children to work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling questions and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions that focus on study skills. Overall, 60% of the marks are for the comprehension questions and 40% of the marks are for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Maths Paper
The Mathematics paper requires children to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes. The majority of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, although there are some additional questions on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties, or geometric names, aiming to test children’s intuition and understanding of mathematical concepts and processes.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Thornhill College 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
One of the most effective ways to prepare for the Thornhill College Transfer Test is to prepare a thorough revision timetable.
Practice exam papers are also an effective revision tool for the Transfer Test. The sooner students start using practice papers, the sooner they’ll become aware of any weaker subject areas. Our practice papers not only familiarise students with the layout of the exam but they help to improve time management skills.
For the Thornhill College 11+ Transfer Test, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Thornhill College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Patrick’s Grammar School, Downpatrick PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Established in 1934 by the De La Salle Brothers, St Patrick’s Grammar School, Downpatrick is a Catholic boys’ grammar school, although girls are accepted in the Sixth Form. St Patrick’s is a specialist school in humanities and has a long tradition of success, not only academically but through the development of pupil’s talents in extracurricular activities.
The school offers a wide range of clubs and activities for pupils to develop their self-confidence and resilience.
Transfer Test Information for St Patrick’s Grammar School Downpatrick
Address: St Patrick’s Grammar School, Saul Street, Downpatrick, County Down, BT30 6NJ
Admissions Info: info@stpatricks.downpatrick.ni.sch.uk, 02844 619722
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 665 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 96 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Patrick’s Grammar School Downpatrick Admissions
Since the Northern Ireland Assembly abolished the previous 11+ process, a number of post primary schools have continued to use a selective admission policy. Currently, 34 schools have joined the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), including St Patrick’s Grammar School, Downpatrick. Each of the schools in the PPTC use the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to St Patrick’s Grammar School, Downpatrick is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Pupils who have a sibling enrolled at the school at the time of selection
- Pupils who are the eldest boy in the family eligible to transfer to mainstream post primary
- Pupils whose sibling has completed his/her grammar school education at St Patrick’s Grammar School.
- Pupils who are transferring from the school’s traditional feeder primary schools
- Pupils for whom St Patrick’s Grammar School is the nearest Catholic grammar school which caters for boys
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at St Patrick’s Grammar School, email info@stpatricks.downpatrick.ni.sch.uk or call the school on 02844 619722.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Patrick’s Grammar School Downpatrick
St Patrick’s Grammar School, Downpatrick, hosts an Open Evening in late January for parents of primary 6 and 7 pupils who might like to attend the school. The Principal will open the event and then there will be an opportunity to take a tour of the school and learn more about the school’s curriculum.
To apply for a Year 8 place, parents should complete the registration form on the PPTC website. The PPTC also provides guidance notes for parents for further information.
St Patrick’s Grammar School Downpatrick Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment sets both test papers for the St Patrick’s Grammar School Transfer Test – one in English and one in maths. In both papers, all questions are multiple-choice and each assessment paper has an assessment booklet, containing any reading passages and questions, and a separate answer sheet. Children will also be given the opportunity to do some practice questions before each marked test.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The assessment includes:
- Comprehension
- Vocabulary
- Spelling and Punctuation
- Study Skills
The comprehension questions make up 60% of the paper’s total mark, while the spelling punctuation and study skills questions make up the remaining 40% of the total mark.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. The content of the paper mostly reflects the school curriculum in Northern Ireland, although there are some questions covering areas which may not feature in any curriculum, such as elementary logic, included to assess intuitive understanding. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and parents will receive the results via post in the following January.
The PPTC website also has a useful FAQs page that provides further information about the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the St Patrick’s Grammar School Downpatrick 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
For students to have the possible chance of gaining a Year 8 place at St Patrick’s Grammar School, they need to invest additional time into revision. Most children at this age respond better to short bursts of revision and just 20 minutes a day can make a real difference to their knowledge.
One of the best ways of highlighting any knowledge gaps quickly is to use practice exam papers. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish 11+ papers that come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their child’s performance and track their improvements.
Students preparing for the St Patrick’s Grammar School Transfer Test will find the following resources particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Patrick’s Grammar School Downpatrick was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Patrick’s Academy, Dungannon PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
St Patrick’s Academy, Dungannon is a co-educational grammar school located in Dungannon, County Tyrone. The school was founded in 1891 by Roman Catholic clergy and in 2003 it became an Academy when two single-sex St Patrick’s Academies merged.
St Patrick’s consistently performs well in exams and has a history of sporting success, winning various trophies across a range of physical activities. The school encourages its pupils to join at least one of the school’s extracurricular activities in an effort to promote pupil confidence and responsibility.
Transfer Test Information for St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon
Address: St Patrick’s Academy, 37 Killymeal Road, Dungannon, County Tyrone, BT71 6DS
Admissions Info: info@stpatricksacademy.dungannon.ni.sch.uk, 02887 727 400
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar School
Number of pupils: 1320 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 208 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon Admissions
Currently, St Patrick’s Academy is one of 34 schools that make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC). This is an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
To gain a place at St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon, students must sit the PPTC Transfer Test. All results from this test are banded and age standardised. Should there be more applicants than available places at St Patrick’s, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Pupils residing in, or transferring from schools in, the parishes outlined on the admissions policy
- Pupils who have a sibling enrolled at the school at the time of application
- Pupils who are the only child or eldest child in the family to transfer to a mainstream school
- Pupils who have a sibling who previously attended St Patrick’s Academy
For more information about the St Patrick’s Academy admissions process, parents can contact the school directly at info@stpatricksacademy.dungannon.ni.sch.uk, or on 02887 727 400.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon
Every January, St Patrick’s Academy hosts an Open Day for prospective pupils and parents to visit the school and sample a range of the Year 8 activities offered. The school recommends that parents attend the Open Day event before applying for a place for their child.
To apply for a Year 8 place at St Patrick’s Academy parents need to download and complete the registration form, which can be found on the PPTC website. Parents are only required to complete one form, as all schools within the PPTC use the same entrance assessment.
St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon Transfer Test Format
The St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon Transfer Test is set by the exam board GL Assessment.
Children will sit two test papers in English and Mathematics and all questions are multiple-choice. Both subjects are taught in all Northern Ireland primary schools, and so the tests aim to reflect the knowledge and skills developed by children in the school curriculum.
English Paper
The English assessment paper requires the children to work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions, which make up 60% of the total mark. There are also a number of spelling questions and punctuation questions, which make up the remaining 40% of the total mark.
Maths Paper
The maths paper requires children to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum, but also includes some additional questions on basic logic, mathematical facts, properties and/or geometric names. Children taking the test should have an understanding of mathematical concepts, and how maths is used in daily life situations.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and parents will receive the results via post in the following January.
The PPTC provides additional material for parents to read, including information about the content of the tests and a useful FAQs page.
How to Prepare for the St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
To increase the chance of success in the St Patrick’s Academy Transfer Test, students need to be organised and create a study plan. By outlining what needs to be studied and when, students won’t feel as anxious as the exam date approaches.
Practice test papers are a great way to prepare for the Transfer Test. Not only can they help improve time management but they familiarise students with the types of questions they may be asked on the day.
For the St Patrick’s Academy, Dungannon Transfer Test, we would specifically recommend the following practice resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Patrick’s Academy Dungannon was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
St Mary’s Grammar School is a co-educational school located in Magherafelt, County Londonderry. Founded in 1927 by the Sisters of the Holy Family of Bordeaux, the school initially opened with 10 girls and now has approximately 1100 students on its roll.
Academically, the school performs well and in 2018 it was ranked joint first in Northern Ireland for its GCSE performance, with 100% of entrants receiving five or more at grades A*-C.
Hear what previous Year 8 pupils had to say about St. Mary’s Grammar School in this short video:
Transfer Test Information for St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt
Address: St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt,
Admissions Info: info@stmarys.magherafelt.ni.sch.uk, 02879 632 320
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 1070 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 153 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt Admissions
St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt is one of the schools in Northern Ireland that use a selective admission policy. It is part of the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), a system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to St Mary’s Grammar School is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. Results of the test are banded and age standardised. In cases where there are more applicants than available places at St Mary’s Grammar School, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Pupil of whom a sibling is or was a pupil at the school
- Pupil who is the first or only child in the family
- Pupil whose parents are members of the permanent teaching or ancillary staff or of the Board of Governors
- Pupil with special needs, medical or other compassionate circumstances
- Pupil selected on the basis of age with the youngest candidate being selected first.
For further information on the school’s admissions process or oversubscription criteria, parents can contact the school directly at info@stmarys.magherafelt.ni.sch.uk or on 02879 632 320.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt
Before applying for Year 8 entry to St Mary’s Grammar School, parents and prospective students are invited to attend one of the school’s Open Days. The school hosts a couple of open evenings in January, which provide the perfect opportunity to ask any questions about the admissions process.
As every school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment, children only need to be registered for the test once. Parents can apply on behalf of their child using the registration form on the PPTC website. There are also some thorough guidance notes for parents, that provide further information on how to complete the registration form.
St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt Transfer Test Format
Children will sit two test papers, in English and Maths, both of which are set by GL Assessment. All questions are multiple-choice and students will be given practice sections before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
English Paper
Children must work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper begins with three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling questions and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions.
Overall, 60% of the marks are for the comprehension questions that follow the reading passages and 40% of the marks are for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Maths Paper
The maths paper generally reflects the school curriculum, but a few questions cover areas which may not feature in any curriculum, such as elementary logic. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations. The remainder of the questions require recall of mathematical facts, properties or geometric names.
Once papers are marked, both are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January. For more information about the content of the test papers, visit the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
With only 153 Year 8 places available, it’s advised that students begin their preparation for the St Mary’s Grammar School exam well ahead of test day. At Exam Papers Plus, we know it can be difficult for students to stay motivated when studying, so we recommend a variety of different approaches.
We recommend reading age-specific books to improve comprehension and using revision games that match students’ preferred learning style.
Our practice exam papers can also provide effective revision practice and help familiarise students with the layout and type of questions that may be asked in the Transfer Test. Students should will find following practice tests particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Mary’s Grammar School Magherafelt was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Michael’s College Enniskillen PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1903, St Michael’s College is a Catholic grammar school located in Enniskillen. The school provides its 670 pupils with a broad, balanced and relevant curriculum. The school aims to develop each boy’s abilities in speaking, listening, reading and writing, in order to prepare them for examinations.
The school places emphasis on the development of positive relationships between all staff and students and as such, has devised a specific Pastoral Care Programme. The programme aims to create an environment where the pupils are valued as individuals and are encouraged to develop to their full potential.
Transfer Test Information for St Michael’s College Enniskillen
Address: St Michael’s College Enniskillen, Chanterhill Road, County Fermanagh, BT74 6DE
Admissions Info: info@stmichaels.enniskillen.ni.sch.uk, 02866 322 935
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 770 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 100 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Michael’s College Enniskillen Admissions
When the old eleven plus process was abolished by the Northern Ireland Assembly, 34 schools joined together to form the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC). The PPTC is an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
St Michael’s College Enniskillen is a member of the PPTC and so admission to the school is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who are sons of the permanent teaching, administrative, technical or ancillary staff of the school
- Applicants whose brother, half-brother, step-brother or legally adopted brother or half-brother is a pupil in the school
- Applicants who are the first boy in the family to reach transfer age
- Applicants whose brother or brothers have spent at least two academic years as a pupil in the school
- Applicants who have had a brother in the school at any time in the past
- Applicants whose father was a pupil in the school
For additional information on the admissions process at St Michael’s, please contact the school directly at info@stmichaels.enniskillen.ni.sch.uk, or on 02866 322 935.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Michael’s College Enniskillen
Before applying for a Year 8 place at St Michael’s College Enniskillen, parents and prospective students should consider visiting the school during one of its Open Events. By visiting the school, parents will be able to determine whether St Michael’s College is the right learning environment for their son.
To register for a place at St Michael’s College, parents need to complete the registration form on the PPTC website. Students only need to be registered for the test once, as each school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment.
St Michael’s College Enniskillen Transfer Test Format
The St Michael’s College Enniskillen Transfer Test is set by the exam board, GL Assessment. All children will sit two test papers in Maths and English. Questions on both papers are multiple-choice and students will be given practice sections before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum with some additional questions on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties, or geometric names. The maths paper is designed to test students’ understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, and their ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
Get further information on the content of the test papers via the PPTC’s website.
How to Prepare for the St Michael’s College Enniskillen 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
While it’s understandable that some children may be nervous about the idea of sitting the Transfer Test, with the right study plan, it needn’t cause any excessive worry.
Parents should help their son set aside time daily to revise. It’s a good idea to introduce practice exam papers into your child’s study routine early on, as they can provide a clearer idea of the structure of the exam. At Exam Papers Plus, we’d recommend that students take our practice papers under timed conditions, as this will get them used to answering questions quickly and under pressure.
Our 11 Plus practice tests will help students successfully prepare for the St Michael’s College Enniskillen Transfer Test. We would specifically recommend the following practice packs:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Michael’s College Enniskillen was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1866, St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School is a Catholic boys’ grammar school located in Belfast. The original school was established by the Irish Christian Brothers and was rebuilt in 1968 on its current site to keep up with student demand. The school now has approximately 1200 boys on its roll, aged 11-18.
St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ is currently under the trusteeship of the Edmund Rice Schools Trust (ERST), a Catholic school network with responsibility for almost 100 schools in Ireland. The school has two priorities: ensure academic success for its students and develop each boys’ social and moral values.
Transfer Test Information for St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School
Address: St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School, 147A Glen Road, Belfast BT11 8NR
Admissions Info: acollins354@c2kni.net, 02890 294 000
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1180 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 175 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Admissions
In the absence of a new eleven plus transfer system, a number of post primary schools in Northern Ireland decided to continue with academic selection. 34 schools currently make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
As a member school of the PPTC, entry to St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Boys who have a brother currently enrolled in the school, or accepted for enrolment
- Boys who are the eldest son in the family or the eldest child at the date of application
- Boys who have a female child of the family currently enrolled in St Dominic’s High School Belfast or accepted for enrolment
- Boys transferring from Primary Schools under the ERST trusteeship, or formerly under the Trusteeship of the Christian Brothers
- Boys transferring from listed feeder schools
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School, please contact the school directly on 02890 294 000.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School
St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School usually hosts an open evening in mid-January for parents and prospective pupils. The event gives parents and students the chance to learn more about the admissions process, to tour the school and speak to staff.
As all schools within the PPTC use the same entrance assessment, children only need to be registered for the Transfer Test once. Parents should apply for a place on behalf of their child via the PPTC’s website. For further information on how to complete the registration form, there are useful guidance notes supplied by PPTC.
St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Transfer Test Format
The St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. To be in with a chance of gaining a place at the school, children must sit two test papers in Maths and English.
All questions across both papers are multiple-choice and children will have a chance to complete a practice assessment for both, as an opportunity to familiarise themselves with the style of questions in the main tests.
Maths Paper
The maths paper is made up of 45 questions and lasts for 45 minutes. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum and pupils will also be tested on some elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties or geometric names. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper is made up of 60 questions and lasts for 50 minutes. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions, which make up 60% of the total mark. This is then followed by spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions, making up the remaining 40% of the total mark.
Scores from both papers are then age standardised and results are posted to parents in the following January. Parents can find more details about the test paper content via the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
At Exam Paper Plus, we recommend that parents help their son create a revision timetable well ahead of the exam date. This ensures that they will have covered all the essential elements of the test before exam day. In addition to working from a revision timetable, parents should consider introducing practice test papers into their son’s revision early on.
The PPTC test requires pupils to answer questions quickly and confidently, with little hesitation. In order to complete the papers within the allocated time, children usually need to improve their time management skills. Our practice papers help students become familiar with the layout and the type of questions that may be asked in the PPTC test.
Students who are currently studying for the St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Transfer Test will find the following resources particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Mary’s Christian Brothers’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Columb’s College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1879, St Columb’s College is a Catholic boys’ grammar school located in Derry. Named after a missionary monk, the college was originally built to educate young people into the priesthood. Today, it’s Derry’s largest and oldest Catholic grammar school, open to around 1400 boys.
Since 2008, St Columb’s College has been a specialist mathematics school and as a member of the Foyle Learning Community, it offers an extensive and varied curriculum. The school offers 19 different subjects timetabled at Key Stage 3 at the time of writing.
Transfer Test Information for St Columb’s College
Address: St Columb’s College, St Columb’s College, Buncrana Road, Derry, BT48 8NH
Admissions Info: info@stcolumbs.com, 02871 285 000
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1400 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 220
Open Day Date: Varies
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Columb’s College Admissions
St Columb’s College is a member of the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission to grammar schools in Northern Ireland.
Admission to St Columb’s College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants of whom a brother or half-brother or step-brother or legally adopted brother or half-brother is a pupil in the school or will be in the coming year
- Applicants who are the first boy in the family to reach transfer age in that family since its arrival in the College’s traditional catchment area
- Applicants who are entitled to Free School Meals
For further information on St Columb’s College admissions process, please contact the school directly at info@stcolumbs.com or on 02871 285 000.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Columb’s College
Before applying for a Year 8 place at St Columb’s College, parents and prospective students are encouraged to attend one of the school’s Open Events. The events provide the opportunity to learn more about the school’s curriculum and the admissions process.
All the documents required for registration can be found on the St Columb’s website. There’s also a helpful timetable and guidance notes on completing the registration form.
As the PPTC use the same entrance assessment across all school, parents are only required to register their child for the test once.
St Columb’s College Transfer Test Format
The St Columb’s College Transfer Test is set by the exam board, GL Assessment. All children will sit two test papers in Maths and English. The questions on both papers are multiple-choice and students will be given practice questions before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. While most of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, there will be some additional questions not included in the curriculum, such as elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties or geometric names. The maths paper is designed to test students’ ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages followed by comprehension questions, which make up 60% of the total mark. The spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions, make up the remaining 40% of total mark.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
The College’s website shares various test familiarisation booklets to help students get a better understanding of what to expect in the Transfer Test.
How to Prepare for the St Columb’s College 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test and they also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practice working under exam conditions.
Our practice papers cover all the key skills required for the Transfer Test and can also be used to identify any weaker areas that may require additional work ahead of the exam. Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of the entrance exam.
Our practice tests can help students prepare for the St Columb’s College Transfer Test. We would specifically recommend the following practice packs:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Columb’s College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Colman’s College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1823, St Colman’s College is a Catholic grammar school for boys aged 11 to 18. Located in Newry, County Armagh, St Colman’s College is well-known for producing Gaelic footballers for local teams in the area.
The College consistently reports good academic achievements and offers its students a wide range of extracurricular activities, including sport, music, drama and debates. In line with the college ethos, the school is committed to nurturing the personal, social, spiritual and moral development of each student in its care.
For an insight into student life at St Colman’s College, watch this short promotional video:
Transfer Test Information for St Colman’s College
Address: Violet Hill, 46 Armagh Road, Newry, BT35 6PP
Admissions Info: info@stcolmans.org.uk, 02830 262 451
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 900 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 125 (approx.)
Open Night Dates: December / January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Colman’s College Admissions
In the absence of new legislation being passed by the Northern Ireland Assembly to replace the previous 11+ transfer system, many post primary schools in Northern Ireland have decided to continue with academic selection. Thirty-four schools currently make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
As a member of the Consortium, entry to St Colman’s College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Boys who have a parent/guardian who is a member of the permanent teaching, administrative, or ancillary staff of St Colman’s College
- Boys who have another boy of the family attending the College or having been selected for admission to the College
- Boys who have had another boy of the family previously attend the College
- Boys whose father/guardian attended the College
- Boys who are the first boy of the family to transfer to secondary education, i.e. the eldest boy
- Boys who are the first boy of the family to apply to a grammar school
- Boys who are entitled to Free School Meals
- Other boys ranked by date of birth with the youngest boy admitted first and all other boys admitted by age (youngest first) until all places have been filled
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at St Colman’s College, contact the school directly at info@stcolmans.org.uk or call 02830 262 451.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Colman’s College
The school hosts open nights in December and January and encourages prospective students and their parents to attend before submitting an application. At these events, parents can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.
Parents can register on behalf of their child via the College’s website or the PPTC’s website. If you have any questions regarding the form, these helpful guidance notes should give clarification.
After the close of the registration period, all applicants will be assigned a designated Assessment Centre. The Centre assigned for the Entrance Assessment has no bearing upon the choice of schools.
St Colman’s College Grammar School Transfer Test Format
The St Colman’s College Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. To be in with a chance of gaining a place at the school, children must sit two test papers – Maths and English.
All questions are multiple-choice and each assessment paper is split into two parts: a Practice Assessment and a Main Assessment. The Practice Assessment is intended to provide children with an opportunity to familiarise themselves with the style of questions in the Main Assessment.
Maths Paper
The mathematics assessment paper begins with a Practice Assessment comprising of three familiarisation questions and six practice questions. The Main Assessment is made up of 45 minutes lasts for 45 minutes.
English Paper
The English assessment paper begins with a Practice Assessment comprising of a short reading passage with three familiarisation questions (comprehension) and seven practice questions (four spelling and three punctuation) which takes about 20 minutes to complete.
The Main Assessment is made up of 60 questions and lasts for 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling questions and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions. Sixty percent of the marks are for the comprehension questions which follow the reading passages and forty percent of the marks are for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the St Colman’s College 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Understandably, students might be apprehensive about sitting the eleven plus transfer test for St Colman’s College. Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, offer excellent practice and thorough preparation. The papers cover all the key skills that children must apply to the test and they can also be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam.
To prepare for St Colman’s College transfer test, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Colman’s College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St. Dominic’s Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
St Dominic’s Grammar School (formerly St Dominic’s Grammar School) was founded in 1870 and is an all-girls grammar school located in Belfast. Originally open with just four pupils, today almost 1000 girls aged 11-18 are educated at St Dominic’s.
The school is a specialist humanities school and performs extremely well in both GCSE and A-Level result tables. St Dominic’s has won ‘Northern Ireland Secondary School of the Year’ numerous times.
Alongside a varied academic curriculum, the school encourages pupils to participate in extracurricular activities in an effort to develop girls’ self-confidence and interpersonal skills.
Transfer Test Information for St. Dominic’s Grammar School
Address: St Dominic’s Grammar School, Falls Road, Belfast BT12 6AE
Admissions Info: info@stdominics.org.uk, 02890 320 081
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 966 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 141 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St. Dominic’s Grammar School Admissions
Students hoping to gain a Year 8 place at St Dominic’s Grammar School are required to sit an entrance test set by GL Assessment. The school is one of 34 that form the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC). The consortium was created in the absence of a new transfer system following the abolition of the old 11 Plus process.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants with a sibling who is currently or formerly was a pupil enrolled in the school
- Applicants who are the first girl in the family or the oldest girl in the family eligible to transfer to mainstream secondary school
- Applicants who are the daughters of past pupils
- Applicants who have a cousin(s) currently attending the school or who previously attended the school
- Applicants who have a sibling attending or who attended a Dominican post primary school or one of the school’s partner post primary schools
For a more information on the admissions process, please contact the school directly via email at info@stdominics.org.uk, or by telephone on 02890 320 081.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St. Dominic’s Grammar School
St Dominic’s Grammar School encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its Open Day in January before registering for the Transfer Test. At the event, the school’s Principal will welcome visitors and there will be the opportunity to take a tour of the school’s facilities.
Children only need to be registered for the Transfer Test once as all schools within the PPTC use the same entrance assessment. Parents can apply for a place for their child via the PPTC website. Please refer to the PPTC’s guidance notes for further information on how to complete the registration form.
St. Dominic’s Grammar School Transfer Test Format
All children that take the St Dominic’s Grammar School Transfer Test must take two test papers in Maths and English.
Both papers contain multiple-choice questions and there is a practice assessment at the beginning of both, intended to provide children with an opportunity to familiarise themselves with the style of questions in the main test.
Maths Paper
The maths assessment paper requires children to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes. The majority of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, although there are some additional questions on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties, or geometric names, aiming to test children’s intuition and understanding of mathematical concepts and processes.
English Paper
The English assessment paper requires children to work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling questions and punctuation questions.
The paper finishes with some general questions that focus on study skills. Overall, 60% of the marks are for the comprehension questions and 40% of the marks are for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
How to Prepare for the St. Dominic’s Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
With the help of our selection of practice test papers, students can increase their chances of securing a Year 8 place at St Dominic’s Grammar School. By implementing a revision plan early and introducing online practice papers, students and parents can identify any weaker areas that may require additional work before the exam.
Children at this age tend to learn more quickly if revision sessions are split into manageable chunks, as opposed to longer, more irregular sessions.
Our 11 Plus practice tests are designed to help students prepare for competitive entry tests like the St. Dominic’s Grammar School Transfer Test. We would specifically recommend the following resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St. Dominic’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Malachy’s College, Belfast PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1833, St Malachy’s College is an all-boys Catholic grammar school with over 1000 students enrolled. The school reports good examination results and regular inspections have found its pupils to be highly-motivated and self-confident.
While the College does set its pupils a challenging academic curriculum, it also has an extensive range of extracurricular activities for boys to join, allowing students to take on roles and responsibilities outside of the classroom.
Transfer Test Information for St Malachy’s College
Address: St Malachy’s College, 36 Antrim Road, Belfast, BT15 2AE
Admissions Info: correspondent@stmalachys.belfast.ni.sch.uk, 02890 748 285
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1050 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 150 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Malachy’s College Admissions
At present, 34 schools make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to St Malachy’s College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who are siblings of present or past pupils of St. Malachy’s College
- Applicants who are the eldest boy of the family eligible to transfer to mainstream post primary education
- Applicants who are sons or grandsons of former pupils of St. Malachy’s College
- Applicants who are entitled to Free School Meals
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at St Malachy’s College, email the school at correspondent@stmalachys.belfast.ni.sch.uk, or call 02890 748 285.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Malachy’s College
St Malachy’s College holds a Year 8 Open Event for parents, which usually takes place in January. This session gives parents the opportunity to ask questions relating to the transfer process and to learn more about the school’s environment. Parents who are considering applying for a place at St Malachy’s for their son should attend this event before applying.
To apply for a place at St Malachy’s College, parents need to register their child via the registration form on the PPTC website. Only one application is required, as every school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment.
St Malachy’s College Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment is the exam board that sets the St Malachy’s Transfer Test. Students are required to sit two test papers in English and Maths. Both papers contain multiple-choice questions and students will have the chance to complete practice sections before the main assessments begin.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. While many of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, there will be some additional questions centred on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties and geometric names. Going into the assessment, pupils should have a knowledge of mathematical concepts and processes, as well as an ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website. The website also has a useful FAQs page that parents might wish to review.
How to Prepare for the St Malachy’s College 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
When it comes to preparing for the Transfer Test, it’s best to start early. The sooner students start revising, the more time they’ll have to increase their knowledge and improve their exam technique. In the first instance, parents should create a revision timetable with their child, making sure that all the elements of the exam are covered.
At Exam Papers Plus, we would encourage students to use practice exam papers early in their revision in order to provide an overview of their current abilities. Not only do practice papers help identify students’ strengths and weaknesses, but they help familiarise them with the layout of the exam.
Regularly testing students with exam practice papers can be also be a good way of monitoring their progress. As exam day approaches, students should take timed practice papers to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.
We have several practice tests that can help your child prepare for the St Malachy’s College PPTC Transfer Test:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Malachy’s College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Louis Grammar School, Kilkeel PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
St Louis Grammar School, Kilkeel was founded in 1927 and is a co-educational Catholic secondary school for children 11-18. Located in Kilkeel, County Down, the school specialises in technology and computing. The school recently got approval to increase its enrolment numbers and in September 2019 expects to increase its roll to 750 students.
The school teaches a Religious Education Programme, which includes considerable emphasis on religious practice during each school year. The school prides itself on supporting its local community and various charities, encouraging pupils to partake in numerous fundraising activities.
For an insight into life at St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel, watch this short video:
Transfer Test Information for St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel
Address: St Louis Grammar School, 151 Newry Road, Kilkeel, Newry, BT34 4EU
Admissions Info: info@stlouis.org.uk, 02841 762 747
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 750 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 130 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel Admissions
Despite a lack of a new transfer system to replace the previous 11 Plus process, many post primary schools in Northern Ireland have continued to use a selective admission policy. At time of writing, 34 schools have joined the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), including St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel, which uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel operates a 3-stage application process. All applications will be considered for Stage One initially and applications which are not admitted at Stage One will automatically be considered at Stage Two. Applications will be considered at Stage Three in the event that residual places remain unfilled. A full breakdown of each stage can be found here.
Following this 3-stage process, in cases where there are still more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who have a sister or brother enrolled at the school at the time of application
- Applicants who, at the date of their application, have a parent/guardian who is a member of the permanent teaching, administrative or support staff of the school
- Applicants whose brother or sister previously attended the school
- Applicants whose mother/father attended St Louis Grammar School as a pupil
- Applicants who are the first child of the family to transfer to secondary education
- Applicants who are entitled to Free School Meals
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at St Louis Grammar School, Kilkeel, parents can contact the school directly via email info@stlouis.org.uk or call 02841 762 747.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel
St Louis Grammar School, Kilkeel encourages parents and pupils to attend one of their open days, which includes a tour of the school and the opportunity to talk to staff. Parents are always advised to attend this event before applying for a Year 8 place at the school.
Each school within the PPTC uses the same entrance test, so parents are only required to register their child for the test once. Parents can download and complete this registration form on the PPTC website. There are also a set of guidance notes that provide further information on how to complete the registration form.
St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment is the exam board that sets the St Louis Grammar School Transfer Test. Students are required to sit two test papers in English and Maths, with a break between the two.
Both papers contain multiple-choice questions and students will have the chance to complete practice sections before the main assessments begin.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. While many of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, there will be some additional questions centred on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties and geometric names. Going into the assessment, pupils should have a knowledge of mathematical concepts and processes, as well as an ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Preparing for the St Louis Grammar School Transfer Test takes time, which is why we advise parents to encourage their child’s revision well ahead of the exam date. The sooner parents can create a revision timetable with their child, the longer they’ll have to prepare.
At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that the ‘little but often’ approach works best when studying for the exam. By breaking down revision into small sections, parents can ensure that their child covers everything they’ll need to know.
Practice exam papers are a great way to identify a student’s strengths and weaknesses. They can also help students familiarise themselves with the exam layout and the types of questions they can expect on the day.
As exam day approaches, students should do timed practice papers to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions to a deadline.
For those children preparing for the St Louis Grammar School, Kilkeel Transfer Test, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Louis Grammar School Kilkeel was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Louis Grammar School Ballymena PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Originally established in 1924 as a school for girls, in 1970 St Louis Grammar School Ballymena became co-educational. The school had a fantastic year in 2018, ranking joint first in Northern Ireland for its GCSE results and first for secondary schools for its A-Level performance.
As a Catholic grammar school, St Louis works with those in the primary and post primary sector through the Ballymena Learning Together learning community. In 2014, it was awarded a substantial grant to improve and extend its facilities, including a modern, dedicated performing arts studio.
For a student perspective on life at St Louis Grammar School, watch this short video:
Transfer Test Information for St Louis Grammar School Ballymena
Address: St Louis Grammar School, Cullybackey Road, Ballymena, BT43 5DW
Admissions Info: mail@stlouisgrammar.com, 02825 649 534
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 960 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 139 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Louis Grammar School Ballymena Admissions
St Louis Grammar School Ballymena is one of the Northern Irish schools that use a selective admission policy for entry into Year 8. It is one of 34 schools to have joined the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC) in response to the abolition of the previous eleven plus testing system.
Admission to Dominican College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. Should there be more applicants than available places, the school will apply the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children who have a sibling currently enrolled at the school
- Children who are the eldest child of the family to be eligible to apply for admission to the school
- Children eligible for free school meals
- Children selected on the basis of age with the youngest candidate being selected first
For more information on the St Louis Grammar School’s admissions process, please contact the school directly via email at mail@stlouisgrammar.com, or by telephone on 02825 649 534.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to St Louis Grammar School Ballymena
Parents and prospective pupils are encouraged to attend either of the school’s Open Evenings, which usually take place in January. There will be an opportunity to meet students and teachers and see some of the work from current students.
As all schools within the PPTC use the same entrance assessment, children are only required to be registered for the test once. Parents can apply on behalf of their child using the registration form on the PPTC website. For further information on how to complete the form, parents can refer to the PPTC’s guidance notes.
St Louis Grammar School Ballymena Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment is the exam board that sets the St Louis Grammar School Transfer Test. The exam consists of two papers in English and Maths where students are required to answer a series of multiple-choice questions.
Before both papers, students are given a short practice section to help familiarise them with the exam layout.
English Paper
The English paper contains 60 questions and lasts for 50 minutes. Beginning with three reading passages, this comprehension section makes up 60% of the total mark. Students must then answer questions on spelling and punctuation, followed by general questions, which make up the remaining 40% of the total mark of the paper.
Maths Paper
The maths paper contains 45 questions and lasts for 45 minutes. While the majority of the questions are intended to reflect the school curriculum, a few questions will exist to covering areas not within the curriculum, such as elementary logic. These questions exist to assess students’ intuition of mathematical concepts.
Once both test papers are complete, scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
Parents and guardians can find more information about the tests via the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the St Louis Grammar School Ballymena 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
As with any exam, it’s best to start revision early. We would advise that students begin by taking a couple of practice exam papers at home to provide an indication of the level they’re currently performing at. Not only do practice papers help to identify strengths and weaknesses, but they help students get used to the exam layout.
As their studying progresses, the practice tests can be re-introduced to see how they’re improving. In the lead up to the exam, we recommend doing timed practice tests so that students get used to answering the questions under exam conditions.
The practice papers that we produce come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their child’s performance and track their improvements. We have several practice papers that can help students prepare for the St Louis Grammar School Transfer Test:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about St Louis Grammar School Ballymena was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Slemish College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
A co-educational secondary school, Slemish College was established in 1996 for pupils aged 11-18. One of the most oversubscribed schools in Northern Ireland, it was given specialist status in humanities in 2008. Located in Ballymena, Slemish College is fully integrated and welcomes children from all cultures.
The school works with pupils to find their own learning style, believing that it’s not just what you learn that matters, but how. The College encourages students to take ownership of their learning, allowing them to become more independent from the beginning of their time at the College.
Transfer Test Information for Slemish College
Address: Slemish College, Larne Road, Ballymena, County Antrim, BT42 3HA
Admissions Info: info@slemish.ballymena.ni.sch.uk, 028 2563 0156
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 760 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 140 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Slemish College Admissions
Slemish College is a member of the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system consisting of 34 schools that use the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to Slemish College is via two routes:
- Route 1 – Academic Entry, 49 places. This route will be considered first with places allocated on the basis of assessment scores
- Route 2 – All Ability Entry, 91 places (non-academic entry)
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, split into the two routes outlined above:
Route 1 – Academic Entry:
- Applicants who have a child currently enrolled at the College
- Applicants who are the eldest child currently in compulsory education, who have had a child of the family previously attend Slemish College
- Applicants who are the eldest child who are currently enrolled at a grant maintained integrated primary school
- Applicants who are the eldest child
Route 2- Non-Academic Entry:
- Applicants who have a child of the family currently enrolled at the College who have selected Slemish College as their First Preference Post Primary school
- Applicants who have a child of the family currently accepted through Stage 1 Academic Based entry who have selected Slemish College as their First Preference Post Primary school
- Applicants who are the eldest child currently in compulsory education, who have had a child of the family previously attend Slemish College, who have selected Slemish College as their First Preference Post Primary school
- Applicants who are the eldest child, who are currently enrolled at a grant maintained integrated primary school and who have selected Slemish College as their First Preference Post Primary school
- Applicants who are the eldest child
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Slemish College, parents can contact the school via email info@slemish.ballymena.ni.sch.uk or call 028 2563 0156
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Slemish College
Slemish College holds a couple of Open Evening events in January for parents and prospective Year 8 pupils to attend. At these events, parents can take a tour of the school, see the facilities and ask any questions they might have about the application process and/or Transfer Test.
Each school within the PPTC uses the same entrance test, so parents are only required to register their child once. Simply register your child via the PPTC website and refer to the site’s guidance notes for further information about how to complete the registration form.
Slemish College Transfer Test Format
Slemish College Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. Children will sit two papers in maths and English. Both papers consist of multiple-choice questions and students will be given practice sections before each paper, with a view to familiarising them with the style of questions in the main test papers.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations. The remainder of the questions require recall of mathematical facts, properties or geometric names. Children will be tested on areas including numbers, money, measurement, geometry and statistics.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The content of the English assessment paper is intended to reflect aspects of English language involving comprehension, vocabulary, punctuation, spelling and study skills. Emphasis is put on comprehension and so this is reflected in the structure of the assessment paper.
The tests are taken in November or December and parents should receive their child’s results in the post the following January. More information on the content of the test papers, visit the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the Slemish College 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
The longer your child has to prepare for the Slemish College Transfer Test, the more time they’ll have to work on any weaker areas. At Exam Papers Plus, we advise that it’s best to start preparation early and ‘little but often’.
Practice 11+ exam papers are an efficient way of ensuring your child is in a strong position heading into the tests. Initially, the papers will give parents a good indication of their child’s current level, and as their studying progresses, the papers will help to chart their progress.
As the exam gets nearer, we’d advise that parents encourage their child to do timed papers under exam conditions, so that they get used to answering questions quickly. The more timed papers your child completes in the lead up to the test, the more their time management skills are likely to improve.
Students currently preparing for the Slemish College 11+ Transfer Test will find the following practice tests particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Slemish College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Our Lady and St Patrick’s College, Knock PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Located in Knock, Our Lady and St Patrick’s College is a co-educational grammar school for children aged 11-18. Founded in 1985, the school is situated in spacious grounds in the Cherryvalley district of Belfast with a panoramic view of the city.
The school is open to over 1200 pupils from across Belfast, offering each a comprehensive, forward-thinking curriculum and a variety of creative, sporting and cultural activities. The school often reports excellent exam results and in 2018 was ranked joint in Northern Ireland for its GCSE performance, with 100 percent of its entrants receiving five or more at grades A* to C.
Transfer Test Information for Our Lady and St Patrick’s College
Address: Our Lady and St Patrick’s College, 120 Gilnahirk Road, Belfast, BT5 7DL
Admissions Info: info@knock.co.uk, 0289 0799890
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 1260 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 180 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Our Lady and St Patrick’s College Admissions
Students hoping to gain a Year 8 place at Our Lady and St Patrick’s College are required to sit an entrance test set by GL Assessment. The school is one of 34 that forms the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), which was established in the absence of a new transfer system following the abolition of the old 11 Plus process. Once students have taken the tests, results are banded and age standardised.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who are entitled to Free School Meals
- Applicants who have a family member at the school (previously or currently)
- Applicants who are the eldest or only child in the family
- Applicants who live nearest the school
- Applicants who are children of current school staff members
- Applicants who are the first child in the family to transfer to a grammar school
For a more thorough explanation of the admissions process, or a breakdown of the oversubscription criteria, please refer to this information guide, or contact the school directly via info@knock.co.uk or 0289 0799890.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Our Lady and St Patrick’s College
Our Lady and St Patrick’s College, Knock, encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its open day in January before registering for the Transfer Test. At this open event, the school’s Principal will welcome newcomers and there will be a series of tours from student guides.
Children only need to be registered for the Transfer Test once, as all schools within the PPTC use the same entrance assessment. Parents can apply for a place for their child via the PPTC’s website. Please refer to the PPTC’s guidance notes for further information on how to complete the registration form.
Our Lady and St Patrick’s College Transfer Test Format
The Our Lady and St Patrick’s College Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. All children must sit two test papers in Maths and English.
Both papers contain multiple-choice questions and are split into two parts: A Practice Assessment and a Main Assessment. The Practice Assessment is intended to provide children with an opportunity to familiarise themselves with the style of questions in the Main Assessment.
Maths Paper
The mathematics assessment paper begins with a Practice Assessment comprising of three familiarisation questions and six practice questions. The three familiarisation questions are worked through with the children and then they are provided with a further 10 minutes to complete the remaining six practice questions. The Main Assessment then begins and requires the children to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes.
English Paper
The English assessment paper begins with a Practice Assessment comprising of a short reading passage with three familiarisation questions (comprehension) and seven practice questions (four spelling and three punctuation) which take about 20 minutes to complete.
The Main Assessment then begins and requires the children to work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions. Overall, 60% of the marks are for the comprehension questions which follow the reading passages and 40% of the marks are for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
How to Prepare for the Our Lady and St Patrick’s College 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Our Lady and St Patrick’s College is a popular grammar school in Northern Ireland and is likely to be oversubscribed for Year 8 places. Due to a high level of competition, parents should be prepared to start their child’s Transfer Test revision well ahead of the actual exam date.
Practice exam papers can give your child the edge over the competition, while also boosting their confidence. These papers allow children to become more familiar with the tests’ requirements and to better understand the types of questions they may be asked.
We would strongly recommend that students do timed practice papers ahead of the exam to help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering questions under a strict time pressure.
Our 11 Plus practice tests are designed to help your child prepare for Our Lady and St Patrick’s College. We would specifically recommend the following resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Our Lady and St Patrick’s College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Rathmore Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Beginning life as a stately home, then a convent, Rathmore Grammar School is now a Catholic co-educational grammar school located in Belfast. Rathmore is one of the leading grammar schools in Northern Ireland and is one of the top four oversubscribed schools in the country.
Rathmore seeks to provide a balanced and broad curriculum that promotes the spiritual, moral, social and cultural development of pupils and prepares them for the responsibilities and challenges of life after education. Community prayer and worship are central to life at the school and pupils are encouraged to participate in various group retreats and the school’s pastoral care programme.
Watch this promotional video to see more of life at Rathmore Grammar School:
Transfer Test Information for Rathmore Grammar School
Address: Rathmore Grammar School, Kingsway, Finaghy, Belfast, BT10 0LF
Admissions Info: info@rathmoregs.belfast.ni.sch.uk, 02890 610115
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 1280 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 180 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Rathmore Grammar School Admissions
When the previous eleven plus process was abolished without a replacement, 34 schools joined together to form the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Rathmore is a member of the PPTC and so admission to the school is determined by student performance in the Transfer Test. The school regularly reports to be oversubscribed at Year 8, so where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Children whose brother or sister is a present or past pupil of the School
- Children whose brother or sister is an eldest child who achieved grade A and applied to the School but was not selected
- Children who are the eldest child in a family to have achieved a grade A or the particular grade being considered or the only child in a family to have achieved a grade A or the particular grade being considered
- Children in receipt of Free School Meals
- Children whose parent is a member of the permanent staff of the school or is due to take up such an appointment
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Rathmore Grammar School, parents can contact the school directly, either email info@rathmoregs.belfast.ni.sch.uk or call 02890 610115.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Rathmore Grammar School
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Rathmore Grammar School, please attend the school’s open event, usually held in January. The school’s Principal will address attendees at the event and will give parents a better idea about whether Rathmore is right for their child.
To register for a Year 8 place at Rathmore, simply complete the registration form on the PPTC website. You only need to register for the test once, as each school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment.
Rathmore Grammar School Transfer Test Format
The Rathmore Grammar School Transfer Test is set by the exam board, GL Assessment. All children will sit two test papers in Maths and English. Questions on both papers are multiple-choice and students will be given practice sections before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
Maths Paper
The maths paper is made up of 45 questions and lasts for 45 minutes. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum and pupils will also be tested on some elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties or geometric names. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper is made up of 60 questions and lasts for 50 minutes. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions, which make up 60% of the total mark. This is then followed by spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions, making up the remaining 40% of the total mark.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
Get further information on the content of the test papers via the PPTC’s website. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Rathmore Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
In order to gain one of the 180 Year 8 places at Rathmore Grammar School, children should be prepared to invest a little time into preparing. Parents should consider creating an in-depth study plan well ahead of the exam date with their child, to ensure they are organised.
If students require some additional work in English and/or maths, we would suggest introducing practice exam papers into their revision routine early on, ideally under timed conditions.
Students who are preparing for the Rathmore Grammar School Transfer Test will find the following resources useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Rathmore Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Our Lady’s Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded by the Sisters of Mercy in 1887, Our Lady’s Grammar School is an all-girls Catholic grammar located in Newry. The school began with just nine pupils and currently has around 850 girls enrolled.
Our Lady’s curriculum enables each pupil to realise her full potential and to develop all of her interests and talents. The school also places great emphasis on the spiritual development of their pupils, promoting prayer, spirituality and Christian service at all times.
To learn more about the history of Our Lady’s Grammar School, watch this short video:
Transfer Test Information for Our Lady’s Grammar School
Address: Our Lady’s Grammar School, Chequer Hill, Newry, BT35 6DY
Admissions Info: info@ourladysgrammar.newry.ni.sch.uk, 028 3026 3552
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 850 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 120 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Our Lady’s Grammar School Admissions
Since the Northern Ireland Assembly abolished the previous 11 Plus process, a number of post primary schools have continued to use a selective admission policy. Currently, 34 schools have joined the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), including Our Lady’s Grammar. Each of the schools in the PPTC use the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to Our Lady’s Grammar School is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Girls who, at the date of their application, have a parent/guardian who is a member of the permanent teaching, administrative, or ancillary staff of Our Lady’s Grammar School
- Girls who, at the date of their application, have another girl of the family attending the school
- Girls who have had another girl of the family previously attend the school
- Girls who are the first girl of the family to transfer to secondary education, i.e. the eldest girl of the family
- Girls who are the first girl of the family to apply to a grammar school
- Girls whose mother/guardian attended the school
- Girls who, at the date of their application, are entitled to Free School Meals
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Our Lady’s Grammar School, parents can contact the school directly at info@ourladysgrammar.newry.ni.sch.uk, or call 028 3026 3552.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Our Lady’s Grammar School
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Our Lady’s Grammar School, parents and students are advised to visit the school during its open event, which usually takes place in December or January. This event is the ideal opportunity to learn more about the school’s ethos and ambitions for their pupils.
Each school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment, so parents are only required to register their child for the test once. Parents should apply using the registration form on the PPTC website. If you have any problems completing the form, please refer to these guidance notes for parents for further information.
Our Lady’s Grammar School Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment sets both test papers for the Our Lady’s Grammar School Transfer Test – one in English and one in Maths. On both papers, all questions are multiple-choice and each assessment paper has an assessment booklet, containing any reading passages and questions, with a separate answer sheet. Children will also be given the opportunity to do some practice questions before each marked test.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The assessment includes:
- Comprehension
- Vocabulary
- Spelling and Punctuation
- Study Skills
The comprehension questions make up 60% of the paper’s total mark, while the spelling punctuation and study skills questions make up the remaining 40%.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. The content of the paper mostly reflects the school curriculum in Northern Ireland, although there are some questions covering areas which may not feature in the curriculum, such as elementary logic, included to assess children’s intuitive understanding. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Our Lady’s Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Parents should be prepared to start their child’s Transfer Test revision well ahead of the actual exam date. Practice exam papers are a proven, effective way of increasing your child’s confidence in the run-up to the test. They can help your daughter to become more familiar with the content of the exams and better understand the types of questions they may be asked.
As the exam draws nearer, try to include timed practice papers in your child’s learning routine. Answering questions under timed conditions can help improve their time management skills and get them used to answering quickly.
Our 11 Plus practice tests can help your child prepare for the Our Lady’s Grammar School Transfer Test. We would specifically recommend the following:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Our Lady’s Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Rainey Endowed School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Rainey Endowed School (‘The Rainey’) is a co-educational grammar school located in County Londonderry. Founded in 1707, it has approximately 700 pupils on its roll aged 11-18.
Alongside a balanced curriculum, The Rainey places a heavy emphasis on extracurricular activity, including drama, public-speaking, choirs and orchestras. Sport is also a prominent feature, allowing pupils to develop their talents in various physical activities.
Transfer Test Information for Rainey Endowed School
Address: Rainey Endowed School, 79 Rainey Street, Magherafelt, BT45 5DB
Admissions Info: head@rainey.magherafelt.ni.sch.uk, 028 7963 2478
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 725 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 101 (approx.)
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Rainey Endowed School Admissions
At present, 34 schools, including The Rainey, make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to Rainey Endowed School is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. The Rainey is generally oversubscribed at Year 8, so in cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Children who have a child of the family currently enrolled at the school
- Children who have a child of the family previously enrolled at the school for 2 or more years
- Children who are the eldest child or only child of the family
- Children who are enrolled in one of the contributing primary schools
- Children who have a parent currently employed in a permanent capacity by the Board of Governors of the School
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Rainey Endowed School, parents can contact the school directly at head@rainey.magherafelt.ni.sch.uk, or by telephone on 028 7963 2478.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Rainey Endowed School
Rainey Endowed School holds a Transfer Information Session in June for parents who are considering applying for a Year 8 place for their child. This session gives parents the opportunity to ask questions relating to the transfer process and to learn more about the school’s environment.
To apply for a place at Rainey Endowed School, parents simply need to register their child via the form on the PPTC website. Only one application is required, as every school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment.
Rainey Endowed School Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment is the exam board that sets the Rainey Endowed School Transfer Test. Students are required to sit two test papers in English and Maths, with a break between the two.
Both papers contain multiple-choice questions and students will have the chance to complete practice sections before the main assessments begin.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. While many of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, there will be some additional questions centred on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties and geometric names. Going into the assessment, pupils should have a knowledge of mathematical concepts and processes, as well as an ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website. The website also has a useful FAQs page that parents might wish to review.
How to Prepare for the Rainey Endowed School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Parents shouldn’t be worried about starting their child’s Transfer Test ‘too early’. Providing students with plenty of time to study for the exams will improve their confidence and help parents to recognise any knowledge gaps that their child might have. Children at this age typically respond better to shorter bursts of study practice, and detailed study plan can help map out what needs to be studied when.
Practice exam papers should also be introduced early. These papers can help identify a student’s strengths and weaknesses, allowing parents to allocate additional time in their child’s schedule to areas that need improvement. Practice exam papers can also help improve time management skills.
We have several practice tests that can help students prepare for the Rainey Endowed School Transfer Test. We would specifically recommend the following resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Rainey Endowed School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Sacred Heart Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1930 by the Sisters of St Clare, Sacred Heart Grammar School is a girls’ grammar located in Newry, County Down. The school has over 800 students on its roll aged 11-18 and consistently produces good examination results.
The school strongly believes that its success is partly due to the range of activities available to students. All students are encouraged to participate in at least one area of activity, although many choose more. Girls take part in a series of inter-house competitions throughout the academic year and go on a number of expeditions and field trips to further their experiences.
Transfer Test Information for Sacred Heart Grammar School
Address: Sacred Heart Grammar School, 10 Ashgrove Avenue, Newry, County Down, BT34 1PR
Admissions Info: info@shsnewry.com, 02830 264632
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 855 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 120 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Sacred Heart Grammar School Admissions
Sacred Heart Grammar School is one of Northern Ireland’s post-primary schools to use a selective admission policy. It is a member of the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system consisting of 34 schools that use the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Girls whose parent/guardian is a member of the permanent teaching, administrative, or ancillary staff of school
- Girls who have another girl of the family attending the school
- Girls who have had another girl of the family previously attend the school
- Girls whose mother/guardian attended the school
- Girls who are the first girl of the family to transfer to secondary education
- Girls who are the first girl of the family to apply to a grammar school
- Girls, who at the date of their application are entitled to Free School Meals
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Sacred Heart Grammar School, parents can contact the school directly either via email info@shsnewry.com or call 02830 264632.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Sacred Heart Grammar School
Sacred Heart Grammar invites parents and prospective pupils to their open event, which usually takes place in November. This event is a great opportunity to learn more about the school’s aims and objectives and to ask any questions about the transfer process.
The PPTC use the same entrance assessment across the board, so children only need to be registered for the test once. Parents should apply on behalf of their child using the registration form on the PPTC website. Please refer to these guidance notes for parents for further information about the registration form.
Sacred Heart Grammar School Transfer Test Format
Children registered for the Sacred Heart Grammar School Transfer Test will sit two papers, one in English and one in Maths. Both tests are set by GL Assessment and all questions are multiple-choice.
English Paper
The English assessment paper requires children to work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling questions and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions that focus on study skills. Overall, 60% of the marks are for the comprehension questions and 40% of the marks are for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Maths Paper
The Mathematics paper requires children to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes. The majority of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, although there are some additional questions on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties, or geometric names, aiming to test children’s intuition and understanding of mathematical concepts and processes.
Once the papers are marked, scores from both are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Sacred Heart Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Sacred Heart is a popular grammar school, so parents should expect competition for Year 8 places to be high. With 120 places available, students should prepare for the Transfer Test well ahead of exam day. The best way to help students with their exam preparation is to work together to devise a thorough revision timetable.
Practice exam papers are an effective revision practice for the Sacred Heart Grammar School as they provide a good indication of any weaker subject areas. The papers will help familiarise students with the question types in the exam and will also help to improve their time management skills.
Students currently preparing for the Sacred Heart Grammar School 11 Plus Transfer Test will find the following practice tests especially useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Sacred Heart Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Dominican College, Portstewart PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Located on a cliff overlooking the Atlantic Ocean, Dominican College Portstewart was established in 1917 by the Dominican Sisters. The school became co-educational in 1968 and has grown steadily to its current population of over 530 pupils.
The school has made steady investment since the 1970s and has added ICT facilities to the building in order to prepare students for the technological age in which they live. A new sports hall was added to the school and a new sixth form study centre was opened in August 2014.
Transfer Test Information for Dominican College, Portstewart
Address: Dominican College Portstewart, 2 Strand Road, Portstewart, County Derry, BT55 7PF
Admissions Info: info@dominican.portstewart.ni.sch.uk, 0287 083 2715
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 530 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 100 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Dominican College, Portstewart Admissions
Dominican College is one of 34 Northern Irish schools that have a selective admission policy for entry into Year 8. The school is part of the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), following the abolition of the previous eleven plus testing system.
Admission to Dominican College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. The College has 100 places available in Year 8, 69 of which are based on performance in the GL assessment test. The remaining 31 places are allocated on non-academic criteria. Results from the PPTC test are banded and age standardised.
For students applying via the non-selective route, priority is given to:
- Pupils who state Dominican College as their first-choice school
- Pupils who have a sibling at the school
- Pupils who have had a sibling at the school in the past
- Pupils who are the eldest child in their family
For more information about Dominican College’s admission policy, contact the school directly either via email, info@dominican.portstewart.ni.sch.uk or telephone, 0287 083 2715
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Dominican College, Portstewart
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Dominican College, parents and students are advised to attend one of the school’s Open Events, which are usually held in January. After a welcome from the school’s Principal, there will be an opportunity to meet students and teachers, see some of the work from students and visit various departments.
All schools within the PPTC use the same entrance assessment, so children are only required to be registered for the test once. Parents can apply on behalf of their child using the registration form on the PPTC website. If you are unsure of how to complete the form, refer to this list of guidance notes further information.
Dominican College, Portstewart Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment is the exam board that sets the Dominican College Portstewart Transfer Test. The test is split over two papers in English and Maths and students are required to answer a series of multiple-choice questions. Students are given a short practice session at the beginning of each test to help them become familiar with the exam layout.
English Paper
The English paper contains 60 questions and lasts for 50 minutes. Beginning with three reading passages, this comprehension section makes up 60% of the total mark. Students then answer questions on spelling and punctuation, followed by general questions, which make up the remaining 40% of the total mark of the paper.
Maths Paper
The maths paper contains 45 questions and lasts for 45 minutes. While the majority of the questions are intended to reflect the school curriculum, a few questions cover areas that aren’t in the curriculum, such as elementary logic. These questions exist to assess students’ intuition of mathematical concepts.
Once both test papers are complete, scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
Parents and guardians can find more information about the tests via the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Dominican College, Portstewart 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
For students to have the best chance of gaining a place at Dominican College Portstewart, they should have a thorough revision plan in place well ahead of the exam date. Regular revision will give students a better chance of improving their exam technique, while increasing their subject knowledge and learning how to perform well under exam conditions.
Parents can monitor their child’s academic progress with our selection of 11+ practice exam papers. Students currently preparing for the Dominican College Portstewart 11 Plus Transfer Test will find the following resources particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Dominican College, Portstewart was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Mount Lourdes Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1909, Mount Lourdes Grammar School is a Roman Catholic girls’ grammar located in Enniskillen. Over 700 girls aged 11-18 are enrolled at the school. In 2018, Mount Lourdes was ranked joint 15th in Northern Ireland for its GCSE performance.
The curriculum at Mount Lourdes is designed to give each student the opportunity to realise her full potential and to develop her interests and talents. Students are taught a broad range of subjects and are given a wide variety of extracurricular activities to choose from outside of the classroom.
Transfer Test Information for Mount Lourdes Grammar School
Address: Mount Lourdes Grammar School, Belmore Street, Enniskillen BT74 6AB
Admissions Info: info@mountlds.enniskillen.ni.sch.uk, 0286 632 2265
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 763 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 96
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Mount Lourdes Grammar School Admissions
Mount Lourdes Grammar School is one of 34 schools that make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC). This is an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
To gain a place at Mount Lourdes Grammar School, students must sit the PPTC Transfer Test. All results from this test are banded and age standardised. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school applies the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Girls who have a sister that already attends the school
- Girls who are the first in their family to transfer to secondary education
- Girls ranked by date of birth as entered on the birth certificate with the eldest being admitted first
For more details about the admissions process, or for an expansion on the oversubscription criteria, please contact the school directly, email info@mountlds.enniskillen.ni.sch.uk or call 0286 632 2265.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Mount Lourdes Grammar School
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Mount Lourdes, the school recommends that parents attend its Open Night, which takes place in January. At the event parents and students can take a tour of the school, ask questions and speak to both staff and current pupils.
Each school within the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment for place allocation, so parents need only to register their child once for the entrance test. In the first instance, parents should download and complete the registration form, which can be found on the PPTC website.
Mount Lourdes Grammar School Transfer Test Format
The Mount Lourdes Grammar School Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. For more on the 11 Plus exam boards, please read our post here.
Students will sit two test papers in English and Maths. All questions are multiple-choice and the tests aim to reflect the knowledge and skills developed by children in the school curriculum.
English Paper
The English assessment paper requires students to work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions, which make up 60% of the total mark. There are also a number of spelling and punctuation questions, which make up the remaining 40%.
Maths Paper
The maths paper requires students to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum and also includes some additional questions on basic logic, mathematical facts, properties and/or geometric names. Children taking the test should have an understanding of mathematical concepts, and how maths is used in daily life situations.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and parents will receive the results via post in the following January.
PPTC provides thorough additional material for parents to read, including content within the tests and a useful FAQs page about the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Mount Lourdes Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
At Exam Papers Plus, we recommend that students start revising early, rather than cramming for the test at the last minute. A ‘little and often’ approach to studying for the PPTC test ensures that students remain calm and confident throughout the process.
The Transfer Test requires students to answer questions quickly, so ahead of the exam, parents should encourage their daughter to complete some 11 Plus practice papers under timed conditions.
For the Mount Lourdes Grammar School Transfer Test, we recommend the following resources:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Mount Lourdes Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Loreto Grammar School Omagh PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1855, Loreto Grammar School is a voluntary grammar school for girls aged between 11 and 18. Located in Omagh, Loreto is a Roman Catholic school with approximately 900 girls.
The school aims to develop its pupils’ Catholic faith while nurturing their positive self-image. It offers a broad curriculum, which aims to maximise the academic and creative potential of each pupil.
Transfer Test Information for Loreto Grammar School, Omagh
Address: Loreto Grammar School, James Street, Omagh, BT78 1DL
Admissions Info: info@loretogs.omagh.ni.sch.uk, 0288 2243633
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 900 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 125
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Loreto Grammar School Omagh Admissions
Loreto Grammar School Omagh is one of 34 post-primary schools in Northern Ireland that have a selective admissions policy. Loreto is a member of the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
There are two routes to entry at Loreto Grammar School:
- Route 1 – Academic Selection: of which there are 94 places. This route is given priority with places allocated on the basis of GL Assessment scores.
- Route 2 – Non-Academic Selection: this applies to the remaining 31 places.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, split into the two routes outlined above:
Route 1
- Girls who have a sister or other relative at the school
- Girls who are the first in their family eligible to transfer to mainstream Post-Primary education
- Girls who are the youngest according to their birth certificate. This criterion will alternate between youngest and eldest in subsequent years
Route 2
- Girls who name Loreto Grammar School as first preference on the Transfer Form
- Girls who already have a sister at the school
- Girls who are the first in their family eligible to transfer to mainstream Post-Primary education
- Girls who are the youngest according to their birth certificate. This criterion will alternate between youngest and eldest in subsequent years
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Loreto Grammar School, contact the school directly via email info@loretogs.omagh.ni.sch.uk or call 0288 2243633.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Loreto Grammar School Omagh
Loreto Grammar School Omagh hosts an Open Night in January that gives parents and prospective pupils the opportunity to visit the school. The event provides more information about the school’s aims and objectives and gives parents the chance to decide whether Loreto is the right learning environment for their daughter.
The PPTC use the same entrance assessment across the board, so children only need to be registered once for the test. Parents should apply on behalf of their child using the registration form on the PPTC website. Please refer to these guidance notes for further information on completing the registration form.
Loreto Grammar School Omagh Transfer Test Format
Children registered for the Loreto Grammar School Omagh Transfer Test will sit two papers, one in English and one in Maths. Both tests are set by GL Assessment. Each assessment paper has an assessment booklet, containing reading passages and questions and a separate answer sheet. All questions are multiple-choice, with either 4 or 5 potential answer options depending on the question type.
English Paper
The English assessment paper requires students to work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions.
Overall, the comprehension questions account for 60% of the total score and the spelling, punctuation and general questions account for 40%.
Maths Paper
The Mathematics assessment paper requires children to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes. The majority of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, although there are some additional questions on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties, or geometric names. The questions aim to test for intuition and understanding of mathematical concepts and processes.
Once the papers are marked, scores from both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Loreto Grammar School Omagh 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Students who are well-prepared for the PPTC Transfer Test are more likely to feel confident and relaxed on test day. At Exam Papers Plus, we recommend that revision sessions are split into manageable chunks, as opposed to longer, more irregular sessions.
One of the most effective ways of preparing for the test is to use eleven plus practice papers. By introducing practice tests into a student’s study plan early, parents will be able to identify any areas that need improvement.
Students currently preparing for the Loreto Grammar School Omagh PPTC Transfer Test will find the following resources useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Loreto Grammar School Omagh was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Hunterhouse College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Located in Belfast, Hunterhouse College was established in 1987 and is a girls’ voluntary grammar school with approximately 800 pupils. The College was formed from the amalgamation of two local schools – Ashleigh House School and Princess Gardens School.
Throughout Key Stage 3, the College’s curriculum is broad and balanced, designed to encourage a love of learning and finding subjects each student is passionate about. To develop their learning further, girls can take part in a selection of extra-curricular activities such as show jumping, fencing and performing arts.
Transfer Test Information for Hunterhouse College
Address: Hunterhouse College, Upper Lisburn Road, Finaghy, Belfast BT10 0LE
Admissions Info: info@hunterhouse.belfast.ni.sch.uk, 0289 061 2293
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 800 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 100 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment / AQE (Common Entrance Assessment)
Hunterhouse College Admissions
Hunterhouse College uses assessments from both GL Assessment and AQE to determine admission to the school. Students hoping to gain a place at the school will be required to sit one of these assessments, although they can arrange to sit both if desired. In both assessments, once students have taken the tests, results are banded and age standardised.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Children who have a sibling currently enrolled or accepted for admission at the College
- Children who have a sibling who attended Hunterhouse College
- Children who are entitled to Free School Meals
- Children who are the eldest child of the family
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria, email info@hunterhouse.belfast.ni.sch.uk or call the College on 0289 061 2293.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Hunterhouse College
Hunterhouse College holds a familiarisation day prior to the actual assessments to allow children to experience the environment and meet supervising staff. The school also encourages parents and prospective students to visit the school before applying for a Year 8 place.
Parents who intend on having their child take the GL Assessment test should complete the registration form on the PPTC website.
Hunterhouse College Transfer Test Format
Students aiming to gain a place at Hunterhouse College through the PPTC Transfer Test will sit two multiple-choice papers in Maths and English.
Maths Paper – this takes 45 minutes and has 45 questions. The majority of the
questions are based on the school’s curriculum and are designed to test students’ understanding of mathematical concepts and processes.
English Paper – this takes 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the Hunterhouse College 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
The key to preparing for the PPTC Transfer Test is to be organised, focused and prepared. We suggest that parents help their child create an easy-to-follow revision timetable that covers all the required subjects, while also allowing time for relaxation.
Students can maximise the time they have to revise by starting the process early and investing in the best resources available. It’s important to be organised and follow a clear revision strategy. In doing so, students will find the Transfer Test much easier to understand.
Parents can monitor their child’s academic progress by choosing from our selection of online practice papers. Students preparing for the Hunterhouse College Transfer Test will find the following resources particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Hunterhouse College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Lagan College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Formed in 1981 as the first integrated school in Northern Ireland, Lagan College is a co-educational secondary school located in Belfast. The school educates over 1200 pupils of various faiths and is usually oversubscribed.
Students study a balanced curriculum and have the chance to learn different languages. The school’s extracurricular activities include sports, arts, music and crafts.
To see what it’s like to study at Lagan College, watch this short promotional video:
Transfer Test Information for Lagan College
Address: Lagan College, 44 Manse Road, Belfast, BT8 6SA
Admissions Info: info@lagancollege.com, 02890 401810
School Type: Co-Educational Secondary
Number of pupils: 1,262 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 200 (70 place academic ability / 130 places non-academic)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Lagan College Admissions
Lagan College has 200 places available for Year 8 entry. It has a grammar stream entry and an all-ability entry. For the former, 70 places are available and Lagan College will consider the outcome of a pupil’s performance in either the GL Assessment or the AQE Assessment. For the latter, pupils do not have to sit an assessment.
For students taking the GL Assessment, all results are banded and age standardised.
Lagan College is one of Northern Ireland’s most oversubscribed schools. In the likely event that there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who have a brother(s) or sister(s) or half-brother or half-sister enrolled in the College
- Applicants who are the only or eldest child in their family
- Applicants enrolled at a grant-maintained integrated primary school or controlled integrated primary school
- Applicants who have a parent formerly enrolled in the College
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Lagan College, parents can contact the school directly either via email, info@lagancollege.com or telephone, 02890 401810.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Lagan College
Lagan College holds on annual Open Day in January for parents and prospective Year 8 pupils. The event includes a tour of the school and its facilities and provides the opportunity to ask any questions about the admissions process.
Lagan College is one of 34 schools that make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC). Each school within the PPTC uses the same entrance test, so parents are only required to register their child once. Parents can register their child via the PPTC website and refer to the site’s guidance notes for further information about how to complete the registration form.
Lagan College Transfer Test Format
The Lagan College Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. It requires children to sit two test papers in Maths and English. Both papers consist of multiple-choice questions and students will be given practice sessions before each paper with a view to familiarising them with the style of questions in the main test papers.
The main test papers are structured as follows:
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. Most questions have been written to either assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations. The remainder of the questions require recall of mathematical facts, properties or geometric names. Children will be tested on areas including numbers, money, measurement, geometry and statistics.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The content of the English assessment paper is intended to reflect aspects of the English language involving comprehension, vocabulary, punctuation, spelling and study skills. A lot of emphasis is put on comprehension and so this is reflected in the structure of the assessment paper.
The tests are taken in November or December and parents should receive their child’s results in the post the following January. More information on the content of the test papers, visit the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the Lagan College 11 Plus (11+) Transfer Test?
At Exam Papers Plus, we advise that it’s best to start preparation for the PPTC test early with a ‘little but often’ approach.
One of the most effective ways to kick-start your child’s revision is to use practice 11+ exam papers. Initially, the papers will give parents a good indication of their child’s current level, and as their studying progresses, the papers will help to chart their progress.
As the exam gets nearer, we’d advise that parents encourage their child to do timed papers under exam conditions, so that they get used to answering questions quickly. The more timed papers that students complete in the lead up to the test, the more their time management skills will improve.
Students currently preparing for the Lagan College 11+ Transfer Test will find the following practice tests especially useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Lagan College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Lumen Christi College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Located in Derry, Lumen Christi College is a co-educational Catholic grammar school for pupils aged 11-18. Founded in 1997, over 800 pupils attended the school, which is situated on the site of the old St Columb’s College.
Offering a full academic curriculum, Lumen Christi College also gives pupils the chance to participate in various extracurricular activities. To encourage pupils to participate, they are each given one merit per club/activity they join. Additional merits can also be won by taking part in activities such as swimming galas and public speaking or debating events.
Transfer Test Information for Lumen Christi College
Address: Lumen Christi College, Bishop Street, Derry, BT48 6UJ
Admissions Info: info@lumenchristi.derry.ni.sch.uk, 0287 1362595
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 840 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8:
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Lumen Christi College Admissions
When the old 11+ process was abolished by the Northern Ireland Assembly, 34 schools joined together to form the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Lumen Christi College is a member of the PPTC and so admission to the school is
determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who live in Northern Ireland at the time of application
- Applicants of whom a brother/sister, half-brother/sister, step-brother/sister or legally adopted brother/sister is a pupil in the school
- Applicants who are an only child or the eldest child in the family
For more information about the College’s admission process, please email the school directly on info@lumenchristi.derry.ni.sch.uk or call 0287 1362595.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Lumen Christi College
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Lumen Christi College, parents are encouraged to attend the school’s Open Event, which is usually held in January. This event can help parents decide if Lumen Christi College is the right educational environment for their child.
In order to apply for a Year 8 place at Lumen Christi, parents need t0 complete the registration form on the PPTC website in the first instance. Students only need to be registered for the test once, as each school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment.
Lumen Christi College Transfer Test Format
The Lumen Christi College Transfer Test is set by the exam board, GL Assessment. All children will sit two test papers in Maths and English. Questions on both papers are multiple-choice and students will be given practice sessions before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum with some additional questions on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties, or geometric names. The maths paper is designed to test students’ understanding of mathematical concepts and processes and their ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 50 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
Get further information on the content of the test papers via the PPTC’s website.
How to Prepare for the Lumen Christi College 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Practice exam papers can be an effective way of increasing your child’s confidence ahead of the Transfer Test. As students become more familiar with the requirements of the tests, they’ll better understand the types of questions they might be asked.
Our 11 Plus practice tests can help students prepare for the Lumen Christi College’s Transfer Test. We would specifically recommend the following practice packs:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Lumen Christi College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Dominican College Belfast PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Dominican College Belfast is an all-girls’ grammar school situated in Fortwilliam, Belfast. Founded by the Dominican Sisters in 1930, the school is committed to promoting Christian values in everyday school life.
Alongside a broad academic curriculum, Dominican College offers an array of extracurricular activities, including sport, music and drama. Students are actively encouraged to participate in charitable work within the local community. In doing so, the school believes its girls will boost both their self-confidence and life skills.
Transfer Test Information for Dominican College Belfast
Address: Dominican College, Fortwilliam Park, Belfast BT15 4AQ
Admissions Info: info@dominican.belfast.ni.sch.uk, 028 90 370298
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1000 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 150 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January and June
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Dominican College Belfast Admissions
Dominican College Belfast has a selective admission policy. It is part of the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), a system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to Dominican College Belfast is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. Results of the test are banded and age standardised. In cases where there are more applicants than available places at Dominican College Belfast, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Applicants who have a sibling currently enrolled at Dominican College
- Applicants who have had a sibling enrolled at Dominican College
- Applicants who have moved into the school’s catchment area from another town or district
- Applicants who are entitled to free school meals
If you have specific questions about the school’s admissions process or oversubscription criteria, you are advised to contact the school directly. Email info@dominican.belfast.ni.sch.uk or 028 90 370298.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Dominican College Belfast
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Dominican College Belfast, parents and prospective students are invited to attend of the school’s Open Days. At the event, parents and students will have the opportunity to learn more about the school from staff and current pupils. The event can also give parents a chance to ask any remaining questions they about the school, its admissions process and its overall ethos.
As every school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment, children only need to be registered for the test once. Parents can apply on behalf of their child using the registration form on the PPTC website. There are also some thorough guidance notes for parents, that provide further information on how to complete the registration form.
Dominican College Belfast Transfer Test Format
Children will sit two test papers in English and Maths, both of which are set by GL Assessment. All questions are multiple-choice and students will be given practice sections before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
English Paper
Children must work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper begins three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also some spelling and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions. Overall, 60% of the marks are for the comprehension questions and 40% of the marks are for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Maths Paper
The maths paper generally reflects the school curriculum, but a few questions cover areas which may not feature in any curriculum, such as elementary logic. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations. The remainder of the questions require recall of mathematical facts, properties or geometric names.
Once papers are marked, both are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January. For more information about the content of the test papers, visit the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the Dominican College Belfast 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
The key to preparing for the PPTC transfer test is to be organised. We recommend that parents help their child create a revision timetable that outlines what needs to be studied and when.
Practice exam papers should also form part of a student’s preparation. Completing practice papers under timed conditions can be an effective way of boosting a child’s confidence. Not only do practice papers give students a clearer idea of the structure of the exam, they are also shown to improve a child’s time management skills.
Students currently preparing for the Dominican College 11+ Transfer Test will find the following practice tests especially useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Dominican College Belfast was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Christian Brothers’ Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1861, Christian Brothers’ Grammar School is a boys’ grammar schools located in Omagh. With 950 boys enrolled, the school has an academic focus and offers a broad and balanced curriculum in Key Stage 3. The school provides boys with the opportunity to experience a wide range of subjects during the early years at the school.
Students enjoy a wide variety of extracurricular activities that include sports, music, drama and a series of clubs that cater for different interests. The school also has an established pastoral care system that aims to develop students’ self-esteem both at school and in the wider community.
Transfer Test Information for Christian Brothers’ Grammar School
Address: Christian Brothers’ Grammar School, Kevlin Road, Omagh BT78 1LD
Admissions Info: info@cbs.omagh.ni.sch.uk, 028 8224 3567
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 950 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 135 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Admissions
In the absence of a new transfer system to replace the previous 11 Plus process, many post primary schools in Northern Ireland have continued to use a selective admission policy. To date, 34 schools have joined the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), including Christian Brothers’, which uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Admission to the school can be via two routes and applicants can apply for both:
- Route 1 – Non-Academic Selection – 25% of pupils will be selected by this route (34 pupils)
- Route 2 – Academic Selection – 75% of pupils will be selected by this route (101 pupils)
In the case where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Boys with a brother who is currently a pupil or was a past pupil of the Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Omagh
- Boys with a parent currently on the permanent staff of the Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Omagh or a member of the Board of Governors of the School
- Boys who have a parent or grandparent who is a past pupil of the Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Omagh
- Boys who at the date of their application are the eldest of the family to be eligible to apply for admission to the school
- Boys who are from traditional feeder primary schools
- Boys ranked by date of birth as entered on the Birth Certificate with the eldest being admitted first
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Christian Brothers’ Grammar School, parents can contact the school directly via email info@cbs.omagh.ni.sch.uk, or call 028 8224 3567.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Christian Brothers’ Grammar School
Christian Brothers’ Grammar School welcomes parents and pupils to their Open Day, which is usually held in January. The event includes a tour of the school and the opportunity to talk to staff.
Each school within the PPTC uses the same entrance test, so parents are only required to register their child for the test once. Registration forms can be downloaded from the PPTC website. There are also a set of guidance notes available for parents, which offer further information on how to complete the registration form.
Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Transfer Test Format
GL Assessment is the exam board that sets the Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Transfer Test. Students are required to sit two test papers in English and Maths, with a break between the two.
Both papers contain multiple-choice questions and students will have the chance to complete practice sections before the main assessments begin.
Maths Paper
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. While many of the questions are based on the school’s curriculum, there will be some additional questions centred on elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties and geometric names. Going into the assessment, pupils should have a knowledge of mathematical concepts and processes, as well as an ability to use maths in everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper lasts for 60 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website, here. The website also has a useful FAQs page that relates to the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Christian Brothers’ Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
Parents can help their child prepare for the Transfer Test by creating a study plan that’s achievable. By including down-time for relaxation and opting for short bursts of study practice often, students won’t feel as overwhelmed with their studying.
Practice exam papers are an effective way to increase your child’s confidence for the test, as they allow children to better understand the types of questions they will have to answer.
If your child is currently preparing for the Christian Brothers’ Grammar School 11+ Transfer Test, they will find the following practice tests particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Christian Brothers’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 plus) Information
11+
Located in County Down, Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School is an all-boys’ voluntary day school for students aged 11-18. With the school’s first foundations laid in 1850, it moved to an £18 million modern campus in Newry in 2010.
The school offers a well-rounded Catholic education to approximately 800 pupils. Abbey Christian Brothers’ aims to create a caring community, nurture faith and promote partnerships within the wider community.
For an insight into what it’s like to study at Abbey CBS, take a look at this highlight video from a recent Open Day:
Transfer Test Information for Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School
Address: Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School, 77A Ashgrove Road, Newry BT34 1QN
Admissions Info: info@abbeycbs.co.uk, 0283 026 3142
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 800 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 105 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November / December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Admissions
Some schools in Northern Ireland use a selective admission policy. Thirty-four schools in total make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), a system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
Year 8 admission to Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. Once students have taken the test, results are banded and age standardised. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Children with a parent already working at the school
- Children who already have a brother attending the school
- Children whose father attended the school
- Children who are the first sons in the family to transfer to a grammar school
- Other candidates selected on the basis of age, with the youngest being selected first
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School, parents should contact the school directly via info@abbeycbs.co.uk, or call 0283 026 3142.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School
Before applying for a Year 8 place at Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School, both parents and prospective pupils are invited to attend the school’s Open Day in January. After taking a tour of the school and talking to staff and current pupils, parents will have a better idea of whether it is the right environment for their son.
All schools within the PPTC use the same entrance test, so children are only required to be registered once. Parents should complete the registration form on the PPTC website. To ensure parents complete this form correctly, the PPTC provide details guidance notes for further information.
Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Transfer Test Format
The Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Transfer Test is set by the exam board GL Assessment. Students aiming to gain a Year 8 place at the school are required to sit two test papers in maths and English.
In both tests, all questions are multiple-choice and students will be given practice sections before each paper to familiarise them with the exam layout.
Maths Paper
The maths paper is made up of 45 questions and lasts for 45 minutes. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum and pupils will also be tested on some elementary logic, mathematical facts, properties or geometric names. Most questions have been written either to assess the understanding of mathematical concepts and processes, or to assess the use of mathematics as a practical skill in a range of everyday situations.
English Paper
The English paper is made up of 60 questions and lasts for 60 minutes. The paper begins with three reading passages, followed by comprehension questions, which make up 60% of the total mark. This is then followed by spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions, making up the remaining 40% of the total mark.
Scores from both papers are then age standardised and results are posted to parents in the following January. Parents can find more details about the test paper content via the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
The key to preparing for the Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School entrance exam is organisation and practice ahead of the exam date. The first step should be to create a study timetable, which clearly marks out the required subjects and the time allocated to each. By creating a timetable, parents can keep any exam stress and worry to a minimum.
For the English paper, parents should encourage reading comprehension and spelling practice as both skills are required in the test. The more practice a child gets in these areas, the more likely they are to approach the exam in a calm and measured manner. For the maths paper, students should take time to revise their school work, as the exam paper is based on similar topics.
As part of a child’s revision, parents could introduce practice exam papers into their child’s routine. Not only do practice papers give children a better idea of what to expect from the exam, but they can also boost their confidence. We have a selection of 11 Plus practice tests in the GL Assessment-style that is used in the PPTC Transfer Test.
Students currently preparing for the Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School Eleven Plus Transfer Test will find the following practice tests particularly useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Abbey Christian Brothers’ Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Campbell College PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Founded in 1894, Campbell College is an all-boys’ independent school located in Belfast. The school is a member of the Independent Schools Council and offers its 900 students the option of day or boarding.
Situated on a 100-acre campus, the school has the oldest Combined Cadet Force in Ireland. The school has a strong reputation in sport, particularly rugby, and offers pupils extensive sports facilities.
For and insight into what it’s like to study at Campbell College, take a look at this short promotional video:
Transfer Test Information for Campbell College
Address: Campbell College, Belmont Road, Belfast BT4 2ND
Admissions Info: hmoffice@campbellcollege.co.uk, 0289 076 3076
School Type: Independent Boys
Number of pupils: 900 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 91 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November / December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment and CEA Assessment
Campbell College Admissions
In the absence of a new transfer system following the old 11 Plus process, many post primary schools in Northern Ireland have continued to use a selective admission policy. Campbell College is one of 34 schools that form the Post Primary Transfer Consortium PPTC.
Admission to the College is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test, which is coordinated by GL Assessment. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Children who attended Campbell College Junior School.
- Children who have an older brother attending the College
- Children who have an older brother who is a past pupil of the College
- Children who have a sister currently enrolled in Years 8-14 at Strathearn School or Bloomfield Collegiate School
- Children who are the sons of employees of the College
- Children who are the sons of Old Campbellians
- Children who are the grandsons of Old Campbellians
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Campbell College, parents can contact the school directly at hmoffice@campbellcollege.co.uk or call 0289 076 3076.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Campbell College
Campbell College is a test centre for GL Assessment. The College holds a familiarisation day prior to the actual exam to allow children to meet supervising staff and become familiar with the administration on the day(s). The school also encourages parents to visit the campus before applying for a Year 8 place.
As every school in the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment, children only need to be registered for the test once. For students due to take the GL Assessment, parents should complete the registration form on the PPTC website. The site also provides guidance notes for parents on how to complete the registration form.
Campbell College Transfer Test Format
The Campbell College Transfer Test is set by the exam board, GL Assessment. Children will sit two multi-choice papers in Maths and English.
The maths paper lasts for 45 minutes and has 45 questions. The majority of the
questions are based on the school’s curriculum and are designed to test students’ understanding of mathematical concepts and processes.
The English paper lasts for 60 minutes and has 60 questions. The paper begins with three reading passages followed by comprehension questions (60% of total mark). There are then spelling and punctuation questions, followed by general questions (40% of total mark).
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the AQE website and the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the Campbell College 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
To give students the best chance of gaining a place at Campbell College, parents should create a detailed revision plan with them. Regular revision, little and often, can help students improve their exam technique and increase their subject knowledge.
Our practice exam papers come complete with answers, so parents can easily monitor their child’s progress as they embark on their new study routine.
Students preparing for the Campbell College eleven plus Transfer Test will find the following practice tests especially useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Campbell College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Established in 1993, Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School is a co-educational Catholic grammar school located in Belfast. The school teaches approximately 770 pupils aged between 11 and 18 and prides itself on being inclusive.
The school delivers strong exam results and in 2018 it was ranked joint first in Northern Ireland for its GCSE performance, with 100% of its entrants receiving five or more GCSEs at grades A* to C.
For an insight into life at Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School, take a look at this video from their recent Open Day:
Transfer Test Information for Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School
Address: Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School, Ravenhill Road, Belfast BT6 0BY
Admissions Info: info@aquinas.belfast.ni.sch.uk, 0289 064 3939
School Type: Co-Educational Grammar
Number of pupils: 770 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 100 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School Admissions
In the absence of new legislation being passed by the Northern Ireland Assembly to replace the previous 11+ transfer system, many primary schools in Northern Ireland have decided to continue with academic selection. Thirty-four schools currently make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC), an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission.
As a member school of the PPTC, entry to Aquinas Diocesan is determined by student performance in the PPTC Transfer Test. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children who have a sibling (past or present) in the school
- Children who are the eldest child in the family or the eldest child at the date of application, eligible to transfer to a mainstream post-primary school, or the only child.
- Children who are a son or daughter of a current permanent member of staff of Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School
- Children who attend a relevant feeder primary school
- Children who are entitled to Free School Meals
For more information on the admissions process or oversubscription criteria at Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School, contact the school directly at via email info@aquinas.belfast.ni.sch.uk, or call 0289 064 3939.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School
The school encourages prospective students and their parents to attend its Open Day before submitting an application. At the event, parents can learn more about the admissions process and have an opportunity to tour the school and speak to staff.
Children only need to be registered once for the Transfer Test as all schools within the PPTC use the same entrance assessment. Parents can apply for a place at the school for their child via the PPTC’s website. Please refer to the corresponding guidance notes for further information on how to complete the registration form.
Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School Transfer Test Format
The Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. To be in with a chance of gaining a place at the school, children must sit two test papers in Maths and English.
All questions are multiple-choice and each assessment paper is split into two parts: a practice assessment and a main assessment. The practice assessment is intended to provide children with an opportunity to familiarise themselves with the style of questions in the main assessment.
Maths Paper
The maths paper begins with a practice assessment comprising of three familiarisation questions and six practice questions. The three familiarisation questions are worked through with the children. They are then provided with a further 10 minutes to complete the remaining six practice questions. The main assessment then begins and requires students to work through 45 questions in 45 minutes.
English Paper
The English paper begins with a practice sssessment comprising of a short reading passage with three familiarisation questions (comprehension) and seven practice questions (four spelling and three punctuation) which take about 20 minutes to complete in total.
The main assessment then begins and students work through 60 questions in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions. There are also a number of spelling and punctuation questions. The paper finishes with some general questions.
Overall, 60% of the marks awarded are for the comprehension questions and 40% of the marks are awarded for the spelling, punctuation and general questions.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and results are posted to parents in January.
More information on the content of the test papers can be found on the PPTC website.
How to Prepare for the Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
At Exam Papers Plus, we can help students prepare for both papers in the PPTC Transfer Test.
We recommend that students begin their exam preparation early with 11 plus practice exam papers. Not only do these papers give students a general overview of their current abilities, they also enable parents to identify their child’s current strengths and weaknesses.
As students progress, they can continue to use these practice tests to check on their progress. As the exam date gets closer, we would encourage pupils to complete the practice tests under timed conditions to get them used to answering questions under pressure. Our practice papers come complete with answers, enabling parents to accurately measure their child’s performance and track their improvements.
Students currently preparing for the Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School 11+ Transfer Test will find the following practice tests especially useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Aquinas Diocesan Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Assumption Grammar School PPTC Transfer Test (11 Plus) Information
11+
Assumption Grammar School (AGS) was founded in 1933 by the Missionary Sisters of the Assumption and is the only Assumption school in Ireland. Located in County Down, AGS is an all-girls’ school that teaches over 800 pupils aged from 11 to 19 years.
In recent years, AGS has vastly improved its facilities and in 2012, a new school building was opened that hosts a library, drama studios and music rooms. Girls are divided into one of five houses when they join the school: Drogheda, Faughart, Iona, Knock or Saul.
For and insight into what life is like at Assumption Grammar School, take a look at the school’s promotional video:
Transfer Test Information for Assumption Grammar School
Address: Assumption Grammar School, 24 Belfast Road, Ballynahinch BT24 8EA
Admissions Info: admin@assumption.ballynahinch.ni.sch.uk, 0289 756 2250
School Type: Girls’ School
Number of pupils: 840 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 8: 120 (approx.)
Open Day Date: January
Exam Date: November/December
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Assumption Grammar School Admissions
Assumption Grammar School is one of 34 schools that make up the Post Primary Transfer Consortium (PPTC). This is an unregulated system that uses the same standardised entrance assessment to determine admission following the abolition of the previous eleven plus process.
To gain a place at Assumption Grammar School, students must sit the PPTC Transfer Test. All results from this test are banded and age standardised. Should there be more applicants than available places at AGS, the applies the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Girls who have a sibling (past or present) at the school or already accepted for the coming year
- Girls who are the eldest or only girl in her family, or an applicant who is the first girl in her family to transfer to a grammar school
- Pupils entitled to Free School Meals
- Girls for whom Assumption Grammar School is the nearest Catholic Grammar School which caters for girls
- Girls who are a daughter of a past pupil
For more details about the admissions process, or further clarification about the Assumption Grammar School oversubscription criteria, please contact the school directly via email admin@assumption.ballynahinch.ni.sch.uk or call 0289 756 2250.
How to Apply for Year 8 Entry to Assumption Grammar School
Every school within the PPTC uses the same entrance assessment for place allocation, so parents are only required to register their child once for the entrance test. The registration form can be downloaded from the PPTC website, here.
Before completing the form, Assumption Grammar School recommends that parents and prospective students attend its open day to ensure that the school can provide a suitable learning environment. At the event, parents and students can take a tour of the school, ask questions and speak to both staff and current pupils.
Assumption Grammar School Transfer Test Format
The Assumption Grammar School Transfer Test is set by GL Assessment. If you are unfamiliar with the 11 Plus exam boards, you can find out more about each one, here.
Children will sit two test papers in English and Maths. All questions are multiple-choice. Both subjects are taught in all Northern Ireland primary schools, and so the tests aim to reflect the knowledge and skills developed by children in the school curriculum.
English Paper
The English paper has 60 questions to be completed in 50 minutes. The paper has three reading passages, each of which is followed by a number of comprehension questions that make up 60% of the total mark. There are also a number of spelling and punctuation questions that make up the remaining 40% of the total mark.
Maths Paper
The maths paper has 45 questions to be completed in 45 minutes. The questions are based on the school’s curriculum but also include some additional questions on basic logic, mathematical facts, properties and/or geometric names. Children taking the test should have an understanding of mathematical concepts, and how maths is used in daily life situations.
Scores for both papers are age standardised and parents will receive the results via post in the following January.
PPTC provides thorough material about the test on their website. They also have a useful FAQs page about the transfer test.
How to Prepare for the Assumption Grammar School 11 plus (11+) Transfer Test?
At Exam Papers Plus, we recommend that parents create a study timetable with their child to make sure that they cover everything they’ll need to know for the test. A ‘little but often’ approach usually works best and ensures that they don’t become overwhelmed with the additional workload.
It’s worth investing a good portion of revision time to exam technique. By introducing practice exam papers early in a student’s revision, parents can identify their child’s strengths and weaknesses and adjust their study timetable accordingly.
Students currently preparing for the Assumption Grammar School 11+ Transfer Test will find the following practice tests especially useful:
English – practice tests
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
English (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
English – skill development worksheets
Maths – practice tests
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 1
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 2
Maths (Grammar Schools) Pack 3
Maths – skill development worksheets
Maths Problem Solving (Grammar Schools)
The information provided about Assumption Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Latymer Upper School 11 Plus (11+) Entrance Exam Information
11+
Latymer Upper School is a fully co-educational independent school based in Hammersmith, London. The school is maintained by a charitable trust, The Latymer Foundation, which has a long history. It was founded in 1624 when a wealthy lawyer named Edward Latymer bequeathed money for the education of eight poor boys from Hammersmith.
The modern school educates around 1200 students, girls and boys, aged 11 to 18 and The Latymer Foundation awards a number of bursaries each year to ensure that the school remains accessible to students of all backgrounds. With its 400th anniversary just a few years away, the Foundation recently launched a campaign to raise sufficient funds to be able to support 1 in 4 students with a bursary.
Despite being a city school, Latymer Upper School has a large campus on which historic buildings sit side-by-side with exceptional modern facilities, including a sports centre and two arts centres. A virtual tour of the school is available on its website.
The school won the TES independent school of the year award for 2018.
A video about student life at Latymer Upper School can be viewed on the ‘Our School’ pages of its website.
11 Plus Exam Information for Latymer Upper School
Address: Latymer Upper School, King Street, Hammersmith, London, W6 9LR
County: London
Admissions info: admissions@latymer-upper.org or 020 7993 0063
School Type: Co-educational independent day school
Number of Students: 1200 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 170 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September / October
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Latymer Upper School 11 Plus Admissions
Latymer Upper School has approximately 170 places available in Year 7 each year. Admission is highly competitive, with over seven applications received for each available place last year.
All applicants sit an entrance exam in January. The exam consists of papers in English and mathematics, which are set by the school. Shortlisted candidates are then invited back for interview in late January / early February. School references are also taken into consideration as part of the selection process.
Offer letters are sent out in mid-February. All candidates who are offered a place are invited to attend an offer holders’ evening at the school in February and can visit the school during a working day, to take a tour and meet with the Head, ahead of the acceptance deadline in early March.
Places are offered to selected students regardless of background and means-tested bursaries, which vary from 25-100% of fees, are available. Academic and music scholarships are also available at 11+.
A copy of the school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded via its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Latymer Upper School
Two open days are held by Latymer Upper School for prospective students and their parents in September and October. Booking opens in April.
The deadline for registering to sit the 11+ entrance exam for Latymer Upper School is in mid-October of the year preceding entry (whilst the applicant is still in Year 6). There is a non-refundable registration fee of £125.
Information about exam day will be sent out to all registered candidates in mid-December.
For further information about Latymer Upper School’s application and admissions process, please contact the admissions office: admissions@latymer-upper.org or 020 7993 0063
Latymer Upper School 11 Plus Exam Format
Latymer Upper School sets its own exam papers in English and maths. The papers are intended to identify students with natural ability rather than focusing on prior learning.
The English paper assesses both reading comprehension and writing skills. The latest sample papers indicate that the English comprehension paper is multiple-choice.
The maths paper has a strong focus on problem-solving. Section A is multiple-choice format and Section B is open-answer.
The format of the tests changes from year to year. However, relevant sample papers are sent to parents when they register their child.
How to Prepare for the Latymer Upper School 11 Plus Exam
Your child will understandably be apprehensive and nervous about sitting the 11+ entrance exam for Latymer Upper School. Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
The practice papers are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for Latymer Upper School’s English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English Multiple-Choice Pack 1
11+ English Multiple-Choice Pack 2
11+ English Multiple-Choice Pack 3
11+ English Multiple-Choice Pack 4
To prepare for maths paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
Section A
11+ Mathematics Multiple-Choice Pack 1
11+ Mathematics Multiple-Choice Pack 2
11+ Mathematics Multiple-Choice Pack 3
11+ Problem Solving Multiple-Choice
Section B
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about Latymer Upper School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
King Edward’s School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
King Edward’s School, which is an independent day school for boys aged 11–18, was founded in 1552 by King Edward VI and boasts Sir Edward Burne-Jones and Tolkien amongst its many famous alumni.
The school moved to its current 50-acre site in Edgbaston, next to the University of Birmingham, in the 1930s. It shares the site, which is located approximately three miles from Birmingham city centre with the King Edward VI High School for Girls. The campus offers excellent facilities with the original 1930s school buildings standing side-by-side with state of the art facilities for performing arts, science and languages.
King Edward’s School is an IB World School, which means that all students study the International Baccalaureate (IB) Diploma in the sixth form.
The school’s most recent inspection by the ISI (Independent Schools’ Inspectorate) was in May 2017, when it was found to be ‘excellent’ in all areas.
To ensure accessibility to students of all backgrounds, King Edward’s School runs an Assisted Places scheme, which is funded by the King Edward VI Foundation and donations from alumni and other supporters. It also awards over 20 academic and music scholarships each year.
11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward’s School
Address: King Edward’s School, Edgbaston Park Road, Birmingham, B15 2UA
County: West Midlands
Admissions info: admissions@kes.org.uk or 0121 415 6056
School Type: Boys’ independent day school
Number of Students: 850 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 125 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: October
King Edward’s School 11 Plus Admissions
King Edward’s School is academically selective. It holds entrance exams for 11+ applicants in October of Year 6, which consist of papers in English, maths and verbal reasoning.
Selection is also based on a report from each applicant’s current school and, in many cases, an interview. All candidates being considered for a scholarship or assisted place are interviewed, as are any borderline candidates.
Offers are usually made in early December and the deadline for acceptance is in March of the following year.
A copy of the school’s complete admissions policy can be downloaded from its website.
For further information about admissions, please contact the school’s admissions department: admissions@kes.org.uk or 0121 415 6056.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward’s School
King Edward’s School holds three open days a year – one each term – for prospective students and their parents. The dates can be found on the school’s website and booking is not required. Individual visits can also be arranged by contacting the admissions department: admissions@kes.org.uk or 0121 415 6056.
The parents of all students wishing to be considered for a place at Kind Edward’s School must complete an online 11+ application form. Applications open in March and close in mid-September of the year prior to entry. To be included in the assessment process, there is also a non-refundable entry fee of £25.
King Edward’s School 11 Plus Exam Format
The King Edward’s School 11+ entrance exams are made up of three papers:
- English: comprehension and composition (1 hour 10 minutes, including reading time)
- Maths: arithmetic and problem solving (1 hour)
- Verbal reasoning (1 hour).
All of the exams are based on the National Curriculum for Key Stage 2. The English and maths papers are written by the school and the maths paper is organised so that questions become progressively more challenging. No calculators are allowed.
How to Prepare for the King Edward’s School 11 Plus Exam
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the King Edward’s School 11+ entrance exams. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
To prepare for the King Edward’s School English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about King Edward’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Bancroft’s School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Bancroft’s School is a co-educational independent day school for children aged 7–18. It first opened its doors on the Mile End Road in the East End of London in 1738, but later moved to Tottenham and then, in 1889, to its current site at Woodford Green in the London Borough of Redbridge.
The school takes its name from Francis Bancroft, a wealthy businessman, who bequeathed a large amount of money to The Worshipful Company of Drapers so that they could establish alms houses and a school for the poor.
The original school buildings at Woodford Green, which form an impressive neo-gothic quad, were designed by Sir Arthur Blomfield, who also designed the Royal College of Music in London and Selwyn College in Cambridge.
In the Third Form (Year 7) at Bancroft’s School, pupils study a broad academic curriculum of fifteen subjects, which are narrowed down into a personal personalised programme of study as they approach their GCSEs. They also have a wide range of co-curricular activities available to them.
11 Plus Exam Information for Bancroft’s School
Address: Bancroft’s School, High Road, Woodford Green, Essex, IG8 0RF
County: Essex
Admissions info: admissions@bancrofts.org or 020 8506 6761
School Type: Independent day school (co-educational)
Number of Pupils: 1000 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 60 (approx.)
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Bancroft’s School 11 Plus Admissions
Places in Year 7 at Bancroft’s School are offered based on performance in a competitive entrance exam and an interview.
Each year approximately 450–500 candidates sit the exam, competing for around 60 places.
The entrance exam comprises papers in English and maths and takes place in January of the year of entry. Candidates who perform well in the exam will be invited for interview, where they will be interviewed in pairs by a member of staff.
Offers are posted out in February following the exam and interviews.
The school’s complete admissions policy is published on its website as is an information booklet for prospective parents.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Bancroft’s School
It is recommended that you visit Bancroft’s School before registering your child for the entrance exam. Dates for open days will be published on the school’s website when available.
For your child to be able to sit the 11+ entrance exam for Bancroft’s School you must complete the registration form and pay a non-refundable fee of £60 (this fee is reduced if you are applying only for a place with a means-tested award). A copy of your child’s birth certificate must also be sent with the form and fee.
The closing date for registrations is at the beginning of December in the year prior to entry (while your child is in Year 6).
The school offers Drapers’ Scholarships, Music Scholarships and means-tested Francis Bancroft Scholarships and Foundation Awards. Candidates who only apply for scholarships and/or awards will not be considered for fee-paying places.
For further information about the application and admissions process at Bancroft’s School, please contact the Senior School Admissions Office: admissions@bancrofts.org or 020 8506 6761.
Bancroft’s School 11 Plus Exam Format
The entrance exam for Bancroft’s School comprises three papers:
- English Paper 1 (45 minutes): comprehension
- English paper 2 (20 minutes, including planning time): writing
- Maths (75 minutes): arithmetic and problem solving
The questions on the maths paper become progressively more challenging. Children should complete as much as they can of Section A of the paper before attempting the more difficult problems on the second part of the paper (Section D). This section is designed to help the school make decisions about scholarships and borderline candidates. No calculators are allowed.
How to Prepare for the Bancroft’s School 11 Plus Exam
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the Bancroft’s School 11+ entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
The practice papers are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for the Bancroft’s School English papers, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about Bancroft’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Cheltenham Ladies’ College 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Cheltenham Ladies’ College is an independent school for girls aged 11 to 18. Although predominantly a boarding school, approximately one-fifth of the girls are day students.
The college was founded in 1853 and moved to its current location, on the site of the original Cheltenham Spa, in 1873. The college estate has gradually grown and developed over the years with its most recent additions being an impressive arts centre and large health and fitness centre.
In 2018, the college celebrated its best GCSE results in over 10 years, with three-quarters of all results being the top A* / 9 / 8 grades. In the sixth form, girls can choose to either study A Levels or the International Baccalaureate (IB) Programme, with the college’s IB results being amongst the highest in the country. Alongside its rigorous academic curriculum, Cheltenham Ladies’ College also has over 160 co-curricular activities on offer, covering a vast array of interests and pursuits.
Cheltenham Ladies’ College has a comprehensive website packed with information and the ‘Why CLC?’ section of the site includes a video that features current students speaking about life at the college.
11 Plus Exam Information for Cheltenham Ladies’ College
Address: The Cheltenham Ladies’ College, Bayshill Road, Cheltenham, Gloucestershire, GL50 3EP
County: Gloucestershire
Admissions info: admissions@cheltladiescollege.org or 01242 707070
School Type: Girls’ independent boarding and day school
Number of Students: 850 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 70 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Cheltenham Ladies’ College 11 Plus Admissions
Cheltenham Ladies’ College refers to Year 7 as LC1 (Lower College 1). At this level, there are around 45 boarding and 25 day places available each year.
Parents of all girls wishing to be considered for a place in LC1 must register with the college. Although the published deadline for registration is usually around 12 months prior to entry, it is worth registering early to be included in updates about events and assessments.
The college sets its own entrance exams, which take place in January of the year of entry. The entrance exams can be taken at Cheltenham Ladies’ College, at the candidate’s own school (if they are happy to invigilate) or with a private invigilator (a professional person unrelated to the candidate). Places are offered in early February based on performance in the exam and a reference from the candidates’ current school.
Pre-assessments, designed to assess whether a student is likely to pass the college’s entrance exam, are available between February and October in the year prior to entry. These can be arranged via the admissions department: admissions@cheltladiescollege.org or 01242 707070. Results obtained in pre-assessments are for guidance only and play no part in the admissions and selection process.
Details of scholarships and awards open to 11+ entrants are available on the college’s website. Means-tested bursaries – known as Beale Awards – are also available.
A copy of the Cheltenham Ladies College official admissions policy can be requested via an online enquiry form.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Cheltenham Ladies’ College
As with all independent schools, it is recommended that you visit the college with your daughter prior to registration. Open days are held throughout the year and private visits can also be arranged. Dates and booking information are available on the college’s website.
To be eligible to take the Cheltenham Ladies’ College 11+ entrance exam, your daughter must be registered. A copy of the registration form can be downloaded from the college’s website. A non-refundable fee of £250 is payable at time of registration unless you are applying for a Beale Award.
The college will send you an acknowledgement when your registration has been processed and details of the exam day will be sent to you in due course.
Cheltenham Ladies’ College 11 Plus Exam Format
All 11+ candidates must sit the college’s own entrance examination papers in:
- English
- Mathematics
- Verbal Reasoning.
A ‘Briefing Paper’, which summarises the subject knowledge required and skills assessed by the exam papers, is available on request from the college admissions department.
How to Prepare for the Cheltenham Ladies’ College 11 Plus Exam
Before taking a competitive entrance exam, a little bit of preparation can go a long way. Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
The practice papers are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for the Cheltenham Ladies’ College English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for maths paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the verbal reasoning paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about Cheltenham Ladies College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Putney High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Putney High School is an independent day school for girls aged 4 to 18. It is part of the GDST (The Girls’ Day School Trust), a network of 25 schools and academies in the UK. The school has just celebrated its 125th anniversary having been founded in 1893. The original school had 54 students. Today it has grown to educate approx. 1020 girls. The school takes advantage of its location close to the Thames and offers rowing out of its own boathouse on Putney Embankment as one of its many sports opportunities.
The ‘Life at Senior School’ section of Putney High School’s website provides lots of information about pastoral care, the school’s house system, the curriculum, co-curricular activities, trips and visits, and all other aspects of school life.
11 Plus Exam Information for Putney High School
Address: Putney High School, 25 Putney Hill, London, SW15 6BH
County: London
Admissions info: admissions@put.gdst.net
School Type: Girls’ independent day school
Number of Pupils: 1018
Open Day Date: March
Exam Date: January
Putney High School 11 Plus Admissions
Putney High School is academically selective. However, they interview all applicants for Year 7 entry in November and December prior to the 11+ assessments, which take place in January.
The 11+ assessments comprise two tests in English and Maths and are based on the National Curriculum Year 6 Programmes of Study for those subjects.
Places are offered based on performance in the interview and assessment tests and references from the candidate’s previous school.
Bursaries and scholarships are available. Details of the criteria are given on the schools website with further information available from the GDST.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Putney High School
It is a good idea to visit the school to ensure it is a good fit for your daughter before registering. Senior school open days are held at Putney High School in March and booking is advisable.
Girls who want to be considered for a place at Putney High School must be register by completing an online application form on the school’s website no later than November of the year preceding entry. Applications must be accompanied by a non-refundable £100 registration fee (£150 for overseas applicants).
For further information on applications and admissions procedures, please contact the admissions office: admissions@put.gdst.net.
Putney High School 11 Plus Assessment Format
All 11+ applicants are interviewed by Putney High School in November or December.
The 11+ assessments take place in January and test two subject areas:
- English
- Maths
The tests are based on the National Curriculum Year 6 Programmes of Study for those subjects.
How to Prepare for the Putney High School 11 Plus Assessment Tests
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, can be used to prepare for the Putney High School assessment tests. They cover all the key skills for English and mathematics and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work and build confidence ahead of the tests.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for the Putney High School 11+ English test, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the Putney High School 11+ maths test, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about Putney High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Catherine’s School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
St Catherine’s School occupies a 25-acre site in the village of Bramley, near Guildford in Surrey. It is an academically selective Church of England School for girls aged 4–18, which accepts both day students and boarders.
St Catherine’s School first opened in 1885 with 11 boarders and 6 day students. Its chapel, which dates back to 1894, still has its original Victorian stained-glass windows (designed by Charles Eamer Kempe) and Father Willis organ.
Today, St Catherine’s School educates around 900 girls. It celebrated its 125th Anniversary in 2010, and has since opened its 125th Anniversary Halls, an award-winning facility for music and drama, to mark the occasion. The new halls were officially opened by Her Royal Highness, The Duchess of Cornwall, who went on to become the school’s official patron in 2015.
The school’s most recent inspection by ISI was in 2016 and it was found to be ‘excellent’ in all areas.
11 Plus Exam Information for University College School
Address: St Catherine’s School, Station Road, Bramley, Guildford, Surrey, GU5 0DF
County: Surrey
Admissions info: admissions@stcatherines.info or 01483 899609
School Type: Girls’ independent school (day and boarding)
Number of Students: 900 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
St Catherine’s School 11 Plus Admissions
St Catherine’s is an academically selective school. All applicants wishing to be considered for entry into Year 7, including those from St Catherine’s Prep School, must sit the school’s own 11+ entrance exams in Maths, English, Science and Verbal Reasoning. A report is also requested from the Head of the applicant’s current school.
Means-tested bursaries are available and four academic scholarships are awarded to 11+ entrants each year. These are awarded based on performance in the entrance exams.
St Catherine’s publishes an Annual Information Booklet, which covers everything from the school’s curriculum and co-curricular activities, through boarding and pastoral care to applications, admissions and fees. A copy of the Whole School Admissions Procedure can also be downloaded from the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Catherine’s School
It is recommended that all parents interested in applying for Year 7 entry to St Catherine’s School for their daughter attend one of the school’s open mornings (held year round). Booking can be made via the online form on the school’s website.
Parents of all applicants must complete the registration form, which can be downloaded from the school’s website, and return it to the school along with a non-refundable registration fee of £100 (£200 for overseas students).
The deadline for registration is at the beginning of November. However, it is advisable to register by mid-September so that your daughter can attend a taster morning (open to registered girls only) in early October.
For more information about the St Catherine’s School application and admissions process, please contact the Registrar: admissions@stcatherines.info or 01483 899609.
St Catherine’s School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ entrance exam for St Catherine’s School consists of the following papers set by the school:
- Mathematics
- English
- Science
- Verbal Reasoning.
The papers are based on the content of the Key Stage 2 National Curriculum. The school does not publish past or specimen papers.
How to Prepare for the St Catherine’s School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for the St Catherine’s School English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for Maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the Verbal Reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about St Catherine’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Mary’s School Ascot 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Founded in 1885 by the Institute of the Blessed Virgin Mary, St Mary’s School Ascot is a Roman Catholic boarding school for girls aged between 11 and 18 years. Preference is given to girls who are Roman Catholic and faith plays an important role in school life, with the whole school gathering in the chapel for hymns and prayer each morning.
The school, which has just 380 pupils, occupies a 55-acre site in Ascot and accepts around 40 new girls into Year 7 (11+) each year.
The school’s most recent ISI (independent Schools’ Inspectorate) quality inspection found it to be ‘excellent’ in all areas relating to pupils’ achievements and personal development.
The website for St Mary’s School Ascot provides more information about its Catholic ethos, academic programme and boarding principles.
11 Plus Information for St Mary’s School Ascot
Address: St Mary’s School Ascot, St Mary’s Road, Ascot, Berkshire, SL5 9JF
County: Berkshire
Admissions info: admissions@st-marys-ascot.co.uk or 01344 293614
School Type: Girls’ independent boarding school
Number of Pupils: 380 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 40 (approx.)
Exam Date: January
St Mary’s School Ascot 11 Plus Admissions
St Mary’s School Ascot is a selective school with preference being given to girls who are Roman Catholic.
Parents who would like their daughter to be considered for a place at St Mary’s must register with the school. All registered applicants sit an entrance examination in January of the year of entry. They are also interviewed by the headmistress or one of the deputy headmistresses.
Parents are usually notified whether their daughter is being offered a place or not within three weeks of the examination.
There are three academic scholarships and one all-rounder scholarship available for 11+ entrants at St Mary’s School Ascot. There is also one art scholarship and one music scholarship on offer each year. However, there is competition for these from entrants at 13+ and/or 16+ too. A limited number of means-tested bursaries are available.
A copy of the school’s official admissions policy is available on request from the Registrar: admissions@st-marys-ascot.co.uk. This is also the email address to contact if you have any queries about the admissions process.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Mary’s School Ascot
St Mary’s School Ascot holds four open mornings for the parents of prospective pupils each year. The dates of upcoming events can be found on the school’s website. Booking is essential for all open mornings and can be made by emailing the admissions office.
St Mary’s School Ascot recommends that girls who are interested in a Year 7 place are registered at least two years prior to the year of entry. The registration fee is £200.
To register your daughter, you should contact the Registrar directly on 01344 293614 or admissions@st-marys-ascot.co.uk.
St Mary’s School Ascot 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ entrance exam at St Mary’s School Ascot consists of three papers:
- English
- Mathematics
- Non-verbal reasoning
The general paper covers a variety of skills and may include questions that test spelling, non-verbal reasoning and listening.
The school does not publish past or specimen papers, but will supply some guidelines upon request.
How to Prepare for the St Mary’s School Ascot 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for the St Mary’s School Ascot English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the general paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about St Mary’s School Ascot was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
School of St Helen & St Katharine 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
In the late 1930s, two girls’ schools in Oxfordshire – St Helen’s in Abingdon and St Katharine’s in Wantage – were forced to merge due to a decline in student numbers. The result was St Helen and St Katharine and the school hasn’t looked back since.
Based in the outskirts of Abingdon, St Helen and St Katherine is a high-achieving independent girls’ school that has grown considerably over the past 80 years – it now educates around 720 girls aged 9–18 and boasts many new facilities; the most recent additions being a Science Centre, 3D Design Centre and Sport Centre.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Helen & St Katharine
Address: St Helen and St Katharine, Faringdon Road, Abingdon, Oxfordshire, OX14 1BE
County: Oxfordshire
Admissions info: admissions@shsk.org.uk or 01235 530593
School Type: Girls’ independent day school
Number of Students: 730 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: January
St Helen & St Katharine 11 Plus Admissions
St Helen and St Katherine is an academically selective school. As part of the entrance assessment, all candidates must attend a ‘taster day’ held in October–December of the year prior to entry (while in Year 6), during which they will be interviewed individually by the Headmistress and take part in a group discussion led by a senior member of staff.
Candidates then sit written tests in maths and English in January. A reference from the candidate’s current school will also be obtained.
Academic scholarships may be offered to students who stand out due to excellent performance in the entrance assessment.
The school aims to notify parents or guardians of the outcome of the entrance assessment within 10 days of the tests. The closing date for acceptances is in early March.
A copy of St Helen and St Katharine’s full admissions policy is available on its website along with an Information Booklet, which provides lots of useful information about applications, testing and admissions, including key dates and fees.
If you are unsure whether your daughter is performing at the level required for entry into St Helen and St Katharine, the school offers a diagnostic test, which can be taken one or two years earlier than the 11+. The diagnostic test is intended to give an indication of performance levels and is not part of the entrance assessment.
For further information on applications and admissions to St Helen and St Katharine, including the diagnostic test, please contact the admissions office: admissons@shsk.org.uk or 01235 530593.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Helen & St Katharine
Before applying for a place at St Helen and St Katherine, parents and guardians are advised to visit the school with their daughter at least one year prior to entry. A whole school open day is held each September and other open events are held throughout the year.
Parents or guardians of all girls wishing to be considered for a place at St Helen and St Katharine must complete a registration form and send it to the admissions office, with the non-refundable registration fee of £100 (£200 for overseas candidates), by the closing date in mid-November of the year prior to entry.
Details of the entrance exam will be sent to all applicants in mid-October along with relevant paperwork and details of how to apply for a bursary. Information about the scholarships available at 11+ can be found on the school’s website.
St Helen & St Katharine 11 Plus Test Format
The entrance assessment for St Helen and St Katharine includes the following three tests:
Maths (60 minutes)
The maths paper covers content and skills mainly found on the Year 6 Programme of Study of the National Curriculum and includes questions that will test arithmetic, problem solving and reasoning. Candidates should show full working and/or reasoning for all questions to ensure that they achieve as many marks as possible. No calculators are allowed.
English: Reading (40 minutes)
The reading paper consists of a passage of text followed by a variety of questions to fully test comprehension, including an understanding of the way in which language is used and insight into the author’s intentions.
English: Writing (35 minutes)
The writing paper offers a choice of tasks to test creative writing or discursive (persuasive / argumentative) writing skills. Candidates will be assessed on formal skills, such as structure, grammar, spelling and punctuation, as well as creativity.
How to Prepare for the St Helen & St Katharine 11 Plus Tests
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for St Helen and St Katharine’s 11+ tests. They cover all the key skills for English and mathematics and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the tests and help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for St Helen and St Katharine’s English papers, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for the maths test, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about St Helen and St Katharine was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Albans High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
St Albans High School for Girls is an independent day school for girls aged 4–18. The school was founded in 1889 and the senior school has been at its current site, situated in the heart of historic St Albans, since 1908. The prep school is located in a neighbouring village, just 3 miles away.
The school’s values are ‘scholarship, adventure and integrity’ and, at Key Stage 3, it offers a large range of co-curricular opportunities, including access to 37 different sports, alongside a broad academic curriculum. Girls are encouraged to refine their own individual programmes of study as they progress through the key stage, ahead of making their GCSE selections.
All aspects of the senior school were rated ‘excellent’ by the ISI in their latest report (2017) and, in the most recent GCSE examinations, 98% of the school’s entries achieved grades B–A*.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Albans High School for Girls
Address: St Albans High School for Girls, 1–3 Townsend Avenue, St Albans, Hertfordshire AL1 3SJ
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions info: admissions@stahs.org.uk or 01727 792509
School Type: Girls’ independent day school
Number of Pupils: 1000 (approx.)
Open Day Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
St Albans High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
St Albans High School for Girls is academically selective. Selection is based on performance in an exam, consisting of maths and English papers, and an interview.
The entrance exam takes place in early January and candidates who have met the required standards are invited back for interviews at the end of the month. The interview process includes participation in individual and group meetings, which include discussions and practical challenges.
Together, the exam and interviews are intended to assess skills like problem solving, mental ability, creativity and communication, as well as factual knowledge.
A report from the candidate’s current school will be requested to help with the selection process.
Offers of places are made in early February and the acceptance deadline is at the beginning of March.
A copy of St Albans High School for Girls’ full admissions policy is available on its website.
Academic scholarships may be offered on the basis of performance in the entrance examinations and interviews. Scholarships in music, art / design, drama and sports are also available. Details of scholarships and how to apply for them can be found on the school’s website.
For further information on St Albans High School for Girls’ admissions procedures, please contact the admissions office: admissions@stahs.org.uk or 01727 792509.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Albans High School for Girls
‘Snapshot’ sessions, which offer the chance to experience a typical day at the senior school, are held in November. Booking can be made via an online form. Other open events are held throughout the year and are advertised on the school’s website.
To register your child for Year 7 entry to St Albans High School for Girls, you need to complete the registration form and pay a £100 registration fee. The registration deadline is in November, but it is worth registering before September to be included in the Registrar’s annual mailing about open days and examination dates.
St Albans High School for Girls 11 Plus Entrance Exam Format
The entrance exam for St Albans High School for Girls comprises two papers:
Maths (75 minutes)
The maths paper covers a range of content appropriate to the end of Year 6 and includes questions that will test arithmetic and problem-solving skills.
English (75 minutes)
There are two sections to the English paper: a comprehension section and an essay writing section.
The comprehension section consists of a passage of text followed by a variety of questions to fully test understanding at word level and whole text level. The writing section is a composition task that will be marked according to creative thinking, originality, accurate spelling, punctuation and grammar.
How to Prepare for the St Albans High School for Girls 11 Plus Entrance Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for the St Albans High School for Girls’ 11+ entrance exam. They cover all the key skills for English and mathematics and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the tests and build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process.
To prepare for the St Albans High School for Girls’ English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about St Albans High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
The Stephen Perse Foundation 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Test Information
11+
The Stephen Perse Foundation is a group of six independent schools, which educates children from 3–18 years of age. It is made up of two pre-prep schools in Madingley and Cambridge (ages 3–7), Dame Bradbury’s in Saffron Walden (ages 3–11) and a junior school (ages 7–11), senior school (ages 11–16) and sixth form college (ages 16–18), all in Cambridge.
The Foundation takes its name from Dr Stephen Perse who died in 1615 and bequeathed a parcel land in Cambridge for the express purpose of establishing a grammar school.
The Stephen Perse Senior School, formerly the Perse School for Girls, began accepting boys in September 2017. It operates a ‘diamond model’, which describes the educational pathways that boys and girls take within the Foundation: boys and girls start their education together, but are taught separately in Years 7 and 8 and for core subjects in Years 9, 10 and 11, before coming back together fully in the co-educational sixth form.
The school is at the forefront of digital learning and makes use of lots of cutting-edge technology, which includes all pupils using tablets as ‘virtual satchels’ on a daily basis. It also boasts an innovative new building, which accommodates a learning hub, classrooms and sports facilities, with a sports pitch on its rooftop.
11 Plus Exam Information for the Stephen Perse Foundation
Address: The Stephen Perse Foundation, Union Road, Cambridge, CB2 1HF
County: Cambridgeshire
Admissions info: admissions@stephenperse.com or 01223 454722
School Type: Independent day school for girls and boys
Number of Pupils: 1120 (approx.)
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
The Stephen Perse Foundation 11 Plus Admissions
The entry process for the Stephen Perse Foundation Senior School includes tests in maths and English, a group activity and a general interview with a senior member of staff. The Foundation will also request a reference from the head teacher of your child’s current school.
The entrance exams take place in January.
The interview will primarily be about your child’s interests, but may also include a discussion of the problem-solving question in the second part of the maths test.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to the Stephen Perse Foundation
The Stephen Perse Foundation encourages prospective parents to arrange a personal visit to the school with or without their child, as appropriate. Visits can be arranged by completing an online form. Dates for open events, including taster mornings, are advertised on the school’s website when available.
To request a place for your child at the Stephen Perse Foundation, you must complete a registration form, which can be downloaded from the website. The completed form should only be returned to the school after paying the £100 registration fee by bank transfer. The deadline for registration is in early December of the year preceding entry.
Foundation awards and music scholarships are available, as are means-tested bursaries.
The Stephen Perse Foundation 11 Plus Test Format
The Stephen Perse Foundation sets 11+ entrance tests in maths and English.
The maths test has two parts. The first part assesses knowledge and skills from the National Curriculum Year 6 Programme of Study and the second part takes the form of a problem-solving question.
The English test includes a short piece of descriptive writing and two passages of text, which your child will be asked to comment upon.
How to Prepare for the Stephen Perse Foundation 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for the Stephen Perse Foundation English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers to help develop the relevant skills, spelling and vocabulary. Please note however that the Stephen Perse comprehension task is in a different format, focusing on the comparison of two texts:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for maths paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about the Stephen Perse Foundation was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
University College School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Founded in 1830, the original University College School was based in central London and was part of University College. The school moved to its current location in Hampstead at the beginning of the 1900s. There are three schools – the pre-prep, junior school and senior school (including sixth form) – which are based on different sites.
University College School is an independent day school for boys aged 4–18, but it admits girls into pre-prep and the sixth form. The senior school consistently achieves exam results that are well above the average for UK maintained schools. Alongside its rigorous academic curriculum, it offers a wide and diverse range of co-curricular activities and clubs. It has its own swimming pool and a state-of-the art theatre, which contributes to its excellent reputation for drama and music.
11 Plus Exam Information for University College School
Address: University College School (Senior School), Frognal, Hampstead, London, NW3 6XH
County: Greater London
Admissions info: ssadmissions@ucs.org.uk or 020 7433 2117/2118
School Type: Boys’ independent day school (coeducational sixth form)
Number of Students: 880 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 30 (approx.)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: January
University College School 11 Plus Admissions
University College School is academically selective. All external applicants sit an entrance examination, consisting of papers in English, maths and reasoning (verbal and non-verbal), in January (whilst in Year 6). A full academic and personal report is also requested from each applicant’s current school.
Based on the results of the entrance exam and academic reports, shortlisted candidates will be invited back for interview. The interview process includes a group activity (culminating in a discussion or presentation to a senior member of staff), group interview and personal interview with a member of the teaching staff.
Traditional academic scholarships are not available at University College School, although it occasionally offers prizes to candidates who put in an ‘exemplary’ performance in the entrance exam and interviews. Music scholarships are available and auditions are held shortly after the entrance exam.
Means-tested fee assistance is available. Parents who would like to apply for fee assistance must indicate this on the application form and they will then be contacted by the school’s finance office. If their application is successful, the registration fee will be waived.
A copy of the school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded from its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to University College School
As for all independent schools, it is recommended that parents visit the school with their son prior to making an application. The school holds open evenings aimed at 11+ entrants in the autumn term (booking is not necessary) and personal visits can be arranged via the admissions office.
Parents wishing to register their son to be considered for a place at University College School must complete the online application form. Applications close in mid-November of the year prior to entry. There is a non-returnable registration fee of £125 to be paid at the time of application (via an online payment facility).
The school will send a letter of confirmation on receipt of the completed application form and fee and all registered children will be entered for the entrance assessment.
For further information about University College School’s applications and admissions process at 11+, please contact the senior school’s admissions office: ssadmissions@ucs.org.uk or 020 7433 2117/2118.
University College School 11 Plus Exam Format
The entrance exam for University College School comprises the following papers:
- Mathematics (calculations and problem-solving) – 1 hour
- English (comprehension and composition) – 1 hour
- Reasoning (verbal and non-verbal) – 30 minutes.
The school does not publish past or specimen papers. However, they do state that all papers are designed to be appropriate for a child currently in Year 6.
How to Prepare for the University College School 11 Plus Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for University College School’s English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
To prepare for maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about University College School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Royal Grammar School (RGS) 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Founded in 1509, The Royal Grammar School (RGS) has a history stretching back over 500 years. Its original Tudor school house has survived and is a striking landmark in Guildford city centre. The school is also home to one of just a few surviving chained libraries, where important or valuable books were chained to shelves to allow controlled public access.
Originally a free school, the RGS became an independent day school as recently as 1977. It now educates around 950 fee-paying boys aged 11–18. In 2016, the school celebrated the opening of its first international school in Qatar.
The RGS has produced a couple of promotional films that give an insight into life at the school.
11 Plus Exam Information for The Royal Grammar School (RGS Guildford)
Address: Royal Grammar School, High Street, Guildford, GU1 3BB
County: Surrey
Admissions info: admissions@rgsg.co.uk or 01483 880600
School Type: Boys’ independent day school
Number of Students: 950 (approx.)
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
The Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
All applicants for entry into the First Form (Year 7) at The Royal Grammar School, must sit the school’s own entrance exams in English, maths and verbal reasoning in January of the year of entry (whilst still in Year 6).
All candidates will also be interviewed in pairs, providing an opportunity to speak about themselves and their interests.
Prior to examination day, a report will be requested from the candidate’s current school.
Some candidates may be asked back for a second interview to assist with decision-making.
Following the entrance examinations, the top 25–30 candidates are invited back to sit scholarship papers in English and maths and attend an interview with the Headmaster and Head of Admissions. Decisions regarding scholarships are released in February at the same time as the main 11+ results.
Music scholarships and means-tested bursaries are also available. Parents must indicate an interest in these when they register their child.
A copy of The Royal Grammar School’s full admissions policy is available on its website. The school also publishes a list of FAQs and an ‘Admissions Supplement’ containing lots of useful information about registration, the entrance exams and admissions.
For further information on The Royal Grammar School’s admissions procedures, please contact the admissions office: admissions@rgsg.co.uk or 01483 880600.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to The Royal Grammar School
As with all independent schools, it is advisable to visit the school prior to registering. This will help you to decide whether it is a good fit for your son. The Royal Grammar School holds one open morning in October each year for prospective students and their parents. You can register for attendance via the website. However, appointments can also be made to visit the school during the summer and autumn terms.
To be considered for a place at RGS Guildford, boys must be registered by a parent or guardian by the 1st of November in the year preceding entry (whilst still in Year 6).
The registration form can be found on the school’s website and must be returned to the school with a non-returnable registration fee of £100.
The RGS Guildford 11 Plus Entrance Exam Format
The 11+ entrance exam for The Royal Grammar School consists of papers in English, maths and verbal reasoning:
English (1 hour)
The English paper comprises two parts. There is a comprehension section, which tests understanding of a passage of text, and a writing section with a choice of questions.
Mathematics (1 hour)
The maths paper tests recall of relevant mathematical facts, understanding of a range of concepts and ability to apply maths skills to everyday contexts.
Verbal Reasoning (1 hour)
The verbal reasoning paper is a standardised paper that tests ability in linguistic and numerical problem-solving and reasoning.
All papers, with the exception of the writing paper, use multiple-choice question formats.
The school writes its own tests and does not publish any specimen materials or past papers. However, it states that all tests are designed to be appropriate for boys ‘using the Year 6 Programme of study as per the National Curriculum’.
How to Prepare for The Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Entrance Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers , which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, offer excellent practice and preparation for The Royal Grammar School 11+ entrance exam. They cover all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work ahead of the exam and to help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for The Royal Grammar School’s English paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension and writing skills, including spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English Pack 1 (multiple-choice format)
11+ English Pack 2 (multiple-choice format)
11+ English Pack 3 (multiple-choice format)
To prepare for maths paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics Pack 1 (multiple-choice format)
11+ Mathematics Pack 2 (multiple-choice format)
11+ Mathematics Pack 3 (multiple-choice format)
11+ Problem Solving (multiple-choice format)
To prepare for verbal reasoning paper, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
The information provided about The Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Withington Girls’ School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Withington Girls’ School in Manchester is an independent day school for girls aged 7 to 18. It was founded in 1890 by a group of Manchester families who wanted to provide their daughters with the same educational opportunities that were available to their sons. The school has remained relatively small, with just 540 pupils in the senior school, and is proud of its fairly informal atmosphere and its ethos that ‘the pleasure of academic work should be its own reward.’
As such, which is one of the top ten schools in the UK based on A-level and GCSE results and the best-performing school in the North of England, offers no scholarships and does not award prizes of any sort.
11 Plus Exam Information for Withington Girls’ School
Address: Withington Girl’ School, 100 Wellington Road, Fallowfield, Manchester, M14 6BL
County: Greater Manchester
Admissions info: admissions@wgs.org or 0161 249 3371
School Type: Girls’ independent day school
Number of Pupils: 680 (approx.)
Open Day Date: November
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Withington Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions
Withington Girls’ School is academically selective. All applicants for entry into Year 7 are required to sit an entrance exam, which takes place in January and consists of papers in English, Mathematics and Verbal Reasoning.
For your daughter to be able to take the entrance exam, a completed allocation form must be received by the school before the December deadline prior to the year of entry.
Following the entrance exam, short-listed candidates will be invited to attend a general interview with a senior member of staff. Interviews tend to take place in the 3 to 4 weeks following the exam. Withington will also request a written reference form the Head of your daughter’s current school.
A copy of the school’s full admissions policy is available on the Withington Girls’ School website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Withington Girls’ School
Before applying to Withington Girls’ School it is advisable to attend one of the open days. Whole school open days take place in November and booking is not necessary. However, it is worth registering interest via the enquiry form on the school’s website to receive information about other open events, including senior school taster days.
The application form for Year 7 entry can be downloaded from the school’s website. The application needs to be sent to the school with a recent passport-size photograph of the applicant, along with a copy of the information page of her passport or a copy of her birth certificate. It must be received by the school before the December deadline in the year prior to entry.
A non-refundable registration fee of £50 must be paid to the school before submitting the application form.
The school offer a means-tested bursary. Parents must indicate on the application form if they wish to apply for a bursary. The school does not offer scholarships.
For further information on applications and admissions procedures, please contact the admissions office: admissions@wgs.org or 0161 249 3371.
Withington Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam Format
The entrance exam for Withington Girl’s School consists of three tests:
- English:
- Comprehension (45 minutes)
- Essay (35 minutes)
- Maths (basic skills and problem solving)
- Paper 1 (30 minutes)
- Paper 2 (40 minutes)
- Verbal Reasoning (50 minutes)
The tests take place in classrooms in groups of 25 to try to make the process less intimidating. Calculators cannot be used.
The maths and English papers are written and marked by staff at the school
Further information about the entrance examinations and the format of test day is also available on the website.
How to Prepare for the Withington Girls’ School 11 Plus Entrance Exam
One of the best ways of preparing for competitive entrance exams is to use practice papers. These help students familiarise themselves with the format and question types they will encounter in the actual test in an efficient and effective manner. They also provide an excellent opportunity for students to practise working under time pressure.
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, can be used to prepare for all aspects of the Withington Girls’ School entrance exam. They are designed to challenging to reflect the demands of the tests set by a competitive independent school. The papers provide practice in all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam and help build confidence.
Our 11+ practice papers are thoroughly researched and up to date. Every year, they are used successfully by tens of thousands of students targeting schools with a competitive entrance examination process. They are designed to be age appropriate but challenging, to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s entrance exam.
To prepare for the Withington Girl’s School maths papers, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the English papers, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension, composition, spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
The following practice papers will provide excellent preparation for the verbal reasoning paper:
The information provided about Withington Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Wimbledon High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Assessment Information
11+
Wimbledon High School is an independent day school for girls aged 4 to 18. It is part of the GDST (The Girls’ Day School Trust), a network of 25 schools and academies in the UK, and was founded by the trust in 1880 with just 12 students.
Today, the school educates 920 girls on a site in central Wimbledon, which combines Victorian red-brick buildings with modern, purpose-built facilities for a wide range of subjects. Entry to Wimbledon High School is highly competitive, with over 500 external candidates applying for 45–50 places.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wimbledon High School
Address: Wimbledon High School, Mansel Road, London, SW19 4AB
County: London
Admissions info: heather.anzante@wim.gdst.net or isla.brown@wim.gdst.net
School Type: Girls’ independent day school
Number of Pupils: 920
Number of Year 7 Places: 45–50
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: November and January
Exam Type / Board: Schools own /unknown
Wimbledon High School 11 Plus Admissions
Wimbledon High School offers places to girls who meet the school’s academic requirements and who they feel will benefit from the opportunities they offer.
Places for Year 7 entry are offered based on performance in a range of assessments, which comprise interviews, group tasks and written assessments.
The school tests candidates in two stages. Academic testing will take place in November, with all candidates sitting tests in verbal and non-verbal reasoning. These tests are a core deciding factor in the school’s assessment process and, on the basis of results, approximately half of the original entry will be invited back to take part in a ‘Creative Assessment Day’ in January.
Following the assessments and before offers are made, some candidates may be invited for interviews to help with the decision-making process.
A copy of the school’s full admissions policy is available on the Wimbledon High School website.
Bursaries and scholarships are available and are awarded by the GDST.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wimbledon High School
Applications for Year 7 entry to Wimbledon High School open at the beginning of April in the preceding year. The deadline for registering is in early November. However, it is worth applying early as the school will be running ‘11+ Toolkit’ sessions for all applicants in October and November to provide information about their new 11+ assessment procedures.
Other 11+ open mornings take place throughout the year and details of upcoming dates can be found on the school’s website. Booking is necessary.
The registration form can be downloaded from the school’s website. There is a non-refundable registration fee of £110 (£175 if applying from outside the UK).
The school website includes lots of further information on the application and assessment process, including a guide to Senior School Admissions and a list of 11+ FAQs.
If you require any additional information, please contact the Senior Admissions Secretary: heather.anzante@wim.gdst.net or the Registrar: isla.brown@wim.gdst.net
Wimbledon High School 11 Plus Assessment Format
Wimbledon High School states that it is ‘proud to do things a little differently’ and this includes their new ‘creative 11+ assessments’.
All candidates will be tested in verbal and non-verbal reasoning in the November prior to the year of entry. The results of these tests will be released by the end of the month and approximately half of the candidates will be invited back for a ‘Creative Assessment Day’ in January.
During the ‘Creative Assessment Day’, candidates will take part in a variety of different activities in small groups. The activities are designed to assess a range of qualities and skills, from teamwork and communication to problem solving and numeracy. There will also be a short writing task to complete at the end of the session.
The school will be holding ‘11+ Toolkit’ Sessions in October and November to provide candidates (accompanied by one parent) with further information about the new 11+ assessment process.
How to Prepare for the Wimbledon High School 11 Plus Assessment
Our practice papers, which are available for immediate download, print and use after purchase, can be used to prepare for the Wimbledon High School verbal and non-verbal reasoning tests and also for the writing task that is part of the ‘Creative Assessment Day’.
All of our practice papers are designed to be challenging to reflect the demands of the tests set by a competitive independent school.
The following practice papers will provide excellent preparation for the verbal and non-verbal reasoning papers:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
To prepare for the writing task, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve composition skills, spelling and vocabulary:
The information provided about Wimbledon High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
There are ten grammar schools in the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE). For 11 Plus and admissions information about each school, please visit the pages below:
- Colchester Royal Grammar School
- Colchester County High School for Girls
- King Edward VI Grammar School
- Shoeburyness High School
- Southend High School for Girls
- Southend High School for Boys
- St Bernard’s High School for Girls
- St. Thomas More High School
- Westcliff High School for Girls
- Westcliff High School for Boys
11 Plus Exam Information for Essex Consortium Grammar Schools
Registration Closing Date: July
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CSSE
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Admissions Info: Essex Council, 0845 603 2200, admissions@essex.gov.uk
CSSE 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to all grammar schools in the CSSE are based on pupil performance in the 11 Plus exam.
Essex and Southend grammar school admissions are managed by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE). You can contact them directly at admin@csse.org.uk, or by telephone on 01245 348257.
The schools have one common selection test to ensure that students only sit one exam to cover all the schools on their preference form. All selective places are awarded on the basis of student ability, which is defined by their test score.
For more information on the admission criteria to CSSE schools, please see the CSSE information guide.
How to Register for the Consortium of Grammar Schools in Essex 11 Plus Exam
Before registering for a Year 7 place at a CSSE school, it’s advised that parents attend one of their preferred school’s Open Events. Each school has its own event where parents and students can visit the campus, meet staff and learn more about the admissions process.
To register for a Year 7 place at a CSSE school, parents need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF) before October. The form can be completed online via the Essex Council website.
Parents should also complete a Supplementary Information Form to register their child to take the selective test. The form can be completed online on the CSSE website. Alternatively, it can be obtained from any CSSE school.
Essex Consortium Grammar Schools 11 Plus Exam Format
All CSSE members use the same 11 Plus exam to ensure that students only need to take part in one test. The exam consists of two test papers that cover English and Maths.
The English test typically includes comprehension, grammar, vocabulary, creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy questions. The Maths paper focuses on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised and offers of places are dependent on passing the selection tests. However, it should be noted that passing the selection tests is not a guarantee of being offered a place.
Test results are sent to parents by first class post in October.
Practice Papers for the CSSE 11 Plus Exam
One of the most effective ways to prepare for the CSSE 11 Plus is to use 11 Plus practice tests. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish practice tests that can help students prepare for the CSSE. Our tests can help improve a student’s performance in the final exam and give them a confidence boost before test day. When used under timed exam conditions, our tests can also help improve students’ time management skills.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the 11+ CSSE exam in Essex. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St. Thomas More High School 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Founded in 1960, St Thomas More High School is a Roman Catholic bilateral academy. Located in Westcliff-on-Sea, Essex, the school educates boys between the ages of 11 and 18 and has a co-educational sixth form. There are approximately 1,025 students at the school, making it larger than the average-sized secondary academy. The majority of the school’s students are from local Roman Catholic primary schools although St Thomas More’s does accept pupils from other Christian denominations. The school is currently undergoing a state-of-the-art extension that will include a fitness suite, specialist subject rooms and additional teaching rooms.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Thomas More High School
Address: St Thomas More High School, Kenilworth Gardens, Westcliff-on-Sea SS0 0BW
County: Essex
Admissions Info: office@st-thomasmore.southend.sch.uk, 01702 344933
School Type: High School
Number of pupils: 1010 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
St Thomas More High School 11 Plus Admissions
The school’s Governors place particular emphasis on ensuring that pupils and their families are aware of the school’s expectations and the opportunities that the school offers. St Thomas More’s aims to admit students who will support the school and its reputation, work hard and respect the needs of others.
Of the 150 places available at the school, 30 places will be offered to boys who pass the 11 Plus exam, which is administered by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex, of which the school is a founder member. In the instance that two or more boys tie for the final selective place, allocation will be determined by the school’s oversubscription criteria, which gives priority to:
- Looked After and previously Looked After boys from Catholic families
- Baptised, practising Catholic boys from selected parishes
- Other baptised, practising Catholic boys.
- Baptised Catholic boys.
- Other Looked After boys
- Practising Christian boys that attend a Catholic primary school
- Practising Christian boys
- Families who desire a Catholic education for their son
Additionally, preference will be given within each category to boys who have a sibling at the school and to those who live closest to the school.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Thomas More High School
In order to apply for a Year 7 place at St Thomas More High School parents need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF) as well as the school’s Supplementary Information Form.
In some cases, the application will also need to be supported by a Certificate of Practice, obtained from the applicant’s Parish Priest (or another Priest who knows the family well).
Parents applying for a selective place for their child need to complete the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) application. The CSSE continues to administer the selective test process and details are available at www.csse.org.uk.
The 11 plus exam is taken in September and parents will receive the results in October. Registration begins in early in May, when students are in Year 5.
St Thomas More High School 11 Plus Exam Format
Admission to St Thomas More High School is determined by student performance in two tests that cover English and Maths.
The English paper tests students in comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper focuses on topics contained within the KS2 National Curriculum. Test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils aren’t given an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the St Thomas More High School 11 Plus Exam
In addition to following a study schedule, at Exam Papers Plus, we recommend that students use 11 Plus practice tests to improve their exam technique ahead of the actual exam. Our practice tests help students become familiar with the types of questions they may be asked on the day.
When taken under exam conditions, these practice papers can help improve time management skills and get students used to answering questions while under pressure.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the St Thomas More High School 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about St Thomas More High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Westcliff High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Founded in 1920, Westcliff High School for Girls is a selective grammar school and academy in Southend-on-Sea, Essex. The school educates approximately 1,046 students aged between 11 and 18 and has a co-educational sixth form. Westcliff Girls’ has specialist status in science and engineering and in previous years has achieved the second highest GCSE results in the UK. Westcliff is also a National Teaching School, used for developing the teaching profession.
11 Plus Exam Information for Westcliff High School for Girls
Address: Westcliff High School for Girls, Kenilworth Gardens, Westcliff-on-Sea SS0 0BS
County: Essex
Admissions Info: generalenquiries@whsg.info, 01702 476026
School Type: High School
Number of pupils: 1044 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 150
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
Westcliff High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to Westcliff High School for Girls is determined through a selection procedure administered by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE). For specific information about the admissions process, please contact the school directly at generalenquiries@whsg.info, or by telephone on 01702 476026.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Westcliff High School for Girls
To register a student for the 11 Plus exam at Westcliff High School for Girls, parents need to complete the CSSE Supplementary Information Form (SIF). The form can be completed online on the CSSE website.
In addition, parents applying for a selective place for their daughter must complete the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) application. Further details on the process are available at www.csse.org.uk.
The selective test is taken in September and results are sent to parents in October. Registration for the selective test begins early in May, when girls are in Year 5.
Westcliff High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
Entry to Westcliff High School for Girls is determined by student performance in two tests that cover English and Maths. The English paper features questions on comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper tests students on topics contained within the KS2 National Curriculum.
Test scores are age-standardised, which ensures that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the Westcliff High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
Being organised is key to preparing for the 11 Plus exam. To improve a student’s knowledge, we’d recommend that parents help their child create a study timetable that outlines the topics that need to be covered. In addition, practice exam papers can help improve their exam technique and boost their confidence.
At Exam Papers Plus, we publish 11 Plus practice tests that help familiarise students with the types of questions they may be asked on the day. When taken under timed exam conditions, our practice papers can also help improve time management skills.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the Westcliff High School for Girls 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about Westcliff High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Westcliff High School for Boys 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Founded in 1920, Westcliff High School for Boys is a selective grammar school for boys in Westcliff-on-Sea, in Essex. The school has academy status and is classified as a Humanities College with specialisms in Science, Technology, Engineering and Maths (STEM). The school has recently undergone a series of renovations and has a new sixth form building, science laboratories and technology block.
11 Plus Exam Information for Westcliff High School for Boys
Address: Westcliff High School for Boys, Kenilworth Gardens, Westcliff-on-Sea SS0 0BP
County: Essex
Admissions Info: 01702 475443
School Type: High School
Number of pupils: 1241 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
Westcliff High School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions
Admission to Westcliff High School for Boys is determined by a selection procedure administered by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE). Offers of places are made in early March and parents are given until the end of the month to accept. More information about the testing procedure will be sent to parents by the CSSE in September.
For more information on the admissions process at Westcliff High School for boys, please visit the school’s admission pages, or the Southend on Sea Local Authority website. Alternatively, parents can contact the school directly on 01702 475443.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Westcliff High School for Boys
Before applying for a place at Westcliff Boys, parents and students are encouraged to attend the Year 7 Open Evening, which takes place in September. The event will provide the opportunity to tour the school and attend a talk from the Headteacher.
In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Westcliff Boys, parents need to complete the CSSE Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is used to coordinate testing.
Parents also need to complete the Single Application Form (SAF), which is used across the Southend Local Authority. Please note that Westcliff High School for Boys needs to be named as one of give preferences on the SAF for students to be considered for entry.
Parents who are applying for a selective place for their son must also complete the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) application.
The 11 Plus exam takes place in September and parents will receive the results by the end of October.
Westcliff High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format
Entrance to Westcliff High School for Boys is determined by student performance in the 11 Plus exam. There are two test papers that cover English and Maths.
The English paper tests comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy. The Maths paper focuses on topics contained within the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised to ensure older students don’t have an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the Westcliff High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?
When it comes to preparing for the 11 Plus exam, organisation is key. We recommend that students work from a study schedule to ensure that they cover all the topics they’ll need to know for the exam.
In addition to working from a study plan, we’d recommend that students practice with 11 Plus test papers to refine their exam technique. At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing practice exam papers in a similar style to the 11 Plus. Our practice papers can help familiarise students with the types of questions they may be asked on the day. When taken under timed exam conditions, our papers can also help improve time management skills.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the Westcliff High School for Boys 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about Westcliff High School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St. Bernard’s High School 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Founded in 1910, St Bernard’s High School is located in Westcliff-on-Sea in Essex. It’s a girls’ Catholic bilateral secondary school with a co-educational sixth form. St Bernard’s is both a Specialist Arts School and a Specialist Science School with academy status. The school produces consistently good GCSE and A-Level results and aims to teach its pupils to become ‘confident, articulate, and thoughtful people’.
11 Plus Exam Information for St. Bernard’s High School
Address: St Bernard’s High School Milton Road, Westcliff-on-Sea, Essex, SS0 7JS
County: Essex
Admissions Info: office@stbernards.southend.sch.uk, 01702 343583
School Type: Catholic bilateral
Number of pupils: 852 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 63
Open Day Date: July/October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
St. Bernard’s High School 11 Plus Admissions
Admission to St Bernard’s High School is largely determined by student performance in the CSSE 11 Plus exam. The school admits girls regardless of their faith, although priority is given to pupils who demonstrate a commitment to Catholic education. For information on the admissions process and oversubscription criteria at St Bernard’s High School, please contact the school directly at office@stbernards.southend.sch.uk, or by telephone on 01702 343583.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St. Bernard’s High School
Before applying for a Year 7 place at St Bernard’s, parents and students should attend one of the school’s Open Mornings, which take place throughout October. Alternatively, the school has an Open Evening in July. For more information on the dates of the open events, please visit the school website.
In order to apply for a Year 7 place at the school, parents need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF). Forms can be obtained via the Southend, Essex or Thurrock Local Authority websites. Additionally, parents will usually receive information about the Local Authority admissions process from their child’s primary school.
Parents also need to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which can be obtained from the school.
In addition, parents applying for a selective place for their child must complete the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) application, since the CSSE administers the selective test process. The form can be found at www.csse.org.uk.
The selective test is taken in September and parents will receive the results before the application deadline at the end of October. Registration for the selective test begins in May, when children are in Year 5.
St. Bernard’s High School 11 Plus Exam Format
The St. Bernard’s High School 11 Plus exam consists of two tests that cover English and Maths. The English paper focuses on comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper focuses on topics contained within the KS2 National Curriculum.
Test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils aren’t given an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the St. Bernard’s High School 11 Plus Exam?
Students who follow a structured study plan leading up to the 11 Plus generally feel more confident going into the exam. In addition to working from a schedule, we recommend that students use practice exam papers to familiarise themselves with the type of questions they may be asked on the day.
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing 11 Plus practice papers to help students improve their exam technique. When taken under exam conditions, our practice papers can help improve time management and get students used to answering questions under pressure.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the St Bernard’s High School 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about St. Bernard’s High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
11+ CEM Full Practice Tests – Further details and information
11+
This article contains further information about the following two products:
11+ CEM Practice Test 1
11+ CEM Practice Test 2
These are full CEM practice tests that cover all subjects: Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Reasoning.
For quite some time, we’ve been researching and developing these papers to ensure that they are the most accurate and up to date CEM practice papers available on the market.
Who are these papers designed for?
These papers will prove immensely beneficial if your child is taking one of the following CEM exams:
1) The new 11+ London Consortiumexam, which is created by CEM.
2 )11+ CEM grammar school exams. If you’re not sure if the grammar school/s you are applying for use CEM, contact us and we’ll be happy to confirm for you.
3) Online CEM pre-tests. These are used by some independent schools such as SPGS and JAGS. They are also used for Late Transfer entry in some grammar school regions, like in Buckinghamshire. Once again, if you’re unsure, get in touch and we can advise accordingly.
What do these packs contain?
Each pack contains two parts: Paper A and Paper B. Each paper covers Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Reasoning in smaller timed sections, just like in an actual CEM assessment.
The complete breakdown of each paper is as follows:
11+ CEM Practice Test 1
Paper A
Word Choice – synonyms
Comprehension – multiple-choice
Pictures – figure matrices
Maths 1– open answer
Maths 2– multiple-choice
Paper B
Word Choice 1– antonyms
Maths– long maths
Pictures– sequences
Reading– word cloze
Word Choice 2– shuffled sentences
Word Choice 3 – associations
11+ CEM Practice Test 2
Paper A
Word Choice – synonyms
Maths 1 – multiple-choice
Pictures– image combinations
Comprehension – multiple-choice
Maths 2– open answer
Paper B
Word Choice 1– antonyms
Reading– sentence cloze
Pictures– reflection and odd one out
Maths– long maths
Word Choice 2– definitions
Word Choice 3– adjective associations
Each pack comes with answer sheets so your child can get used to marking their answers exactly as they will need to in the actual exam, both in multiple-choice and in CEM’s unique open-answer format.
Answers are included.
How will these packs benefit my child?
Our 11+ CEM resources have proved immensely popular. However, they have so far all been targeted on specific parts of the test.
These new packs are designed to provide an accurate representation of what a full 11+ CEM exam will be like.
By familiarising your child with the format and styles of questions, you can help remove stress from the exam preparation process and ensure that they perform to their maximum potential.
We’ve paid attention to all details such as question wording, timings, structure, section formats, symbols, fonts, page layouts and even grayscale tones and shading!
As such, we’re confident that these papers afford the most efficient and effective way to prepare for a CEM 11+ assessment.
Click below to learn more and purchase:
11+ CEM Practice Test 1
11+ CEM Practice Test 2
We hope you find these resources beneficial!
Southend High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Established in 1913, Southend High School for Girls is located on Southchurch Boulevard in Southend-on-Sea, Essex. The school has academy status and caters for pupils aged between 11 and 18. The school is rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted in all 31 inspection areas. Southend High School for Girls specialises in languages, and all Key Stage 3 pupils select two languages to study from a choice of French, German and Spanish.
11 Plus Exam Information for Southend High School for Girls
Address: Southend High School for Girls, Southchurch Boulevard, Southend-on-Sea, SS2 4UZ
Admissions Info: admissions@shsg.org
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1036 (approx.)
Number of places in year 7: 180
Open day date: July
Exam date: September
Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
For more information on Southend High School for Girls’ admissions policy, please visit the school’s admissions page. Parents can also take a look at the admissions policy document here.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Southend High School for Girls
Before applying for a Year 7 place at Southend High School for Girls, parents and students are encouraged to visit the school during its open day, which takes place in July. More information about the school’s open day events can be found here.
To apply for a Year 7 place, parents need to complete the CSSE registration form, which can be done online on their website. A Supplementary Information Form (SIF), can also be obtained from the CSSE website.
Southend High School for Girls’ 11 Plus Exam Format
All CSSE members use the same 11 Plus selection test to ensure that students only need to take one exam. The Southend High School for Girls 11 Plus exam consistes of two tests, covering English and Maths.
The English test focuses on comprehension, grammar, vocabulary, creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy. The Maths paper is based on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised and offers of places are dependent on passing the selection tests. However, it should be noted that passing the selection tests is not a guarantee of being offered a place.
Test results are sent to parents by first class post in October.
How to Prepare for the Southend High School for Girls’ 11 Plus Exam
In addition to working from a study timetable, at Exam Papers Plus, we recommend that students use 11 Plus practice tests to get used to the types of questions they may be asked on exam day. We specialise in producing practice exam papers that are similar in style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. When used under timed exam conditions, our tests can also help improve students’ time management skills.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the Southend High School for Girls 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about Southend High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Southend High School for Boys 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Established in 1895, Southend High School for Boys is a selective grammar school with academy status, located in Prittlewell in Southend-on-Sea, Essex. The school is often referred to as SHSB, and teaches pupils aged between 11 and 18. Admission to Southend High School for Boys is dependent on student performance in a selective 11 Plus test, which is set by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE). The school is rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted and consistently produces good GCSE results.
11 Plus Exam Information for Southend High School for Boys
Address: Prittlewell Chase, Southend-on-Sea, Essex SS0 0RG
Admissions Info: enquiries@shsb.org.uk
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 1150 (approx.)
Number of places in year 7: 150
Open day date: June
Exam date: September
Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
Southend High School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions
Entry to Southend High School for Boys is dependent on student performance in the 11+ exam. Full details of the school’s admissions policy can be found in the Southend Borough Council booklet on Secondary School Admissions.
In instances where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following over-subscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked After and previously Looked After children
- Children who pass the selection tests and who have named the school in the EHCP
- Children whose parents’ primary residence is within the priority area
For further details on the school’s admissions criteria, please see the school’s admission pages, here.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Southend High School for Boys
Prior to applying for a Year 7 place at Southend High School for Boys, parents and students are invited to visit the school during its Open Day, which takes place in June. At the event, the headteacher will make a welcome speech and students and parents will have the opportunity to tour the school. There is no need to book a place on the Open Day, interested students can simply turn up to the event.
To register for a Year 7 place, parents need to complete two forms – the CSSE registration form, which is available on the CSSE website, and a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), also available from the CSSE website.
Additionally, parents living in Essex need to state their child’s preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), which is available in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.
Please note that only boys who have been entered for the test will be considered for admission.
Southend High School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format
The CSSE 11 Plus exam has two written papers in maths and English, which are usually taken in September. There is only one selection test for schools that are members of the CSSE to ensure that students don’t need to sit several tests.
The English paper tests for comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper contains questions based on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the Southend High School for Boys’ 11 Plus Exam
One of the most effective ways for students to prepare for the CSSE 11 Plus exam is to work from a study schedule that outlines what topics need to be covered and when. At Exam Papers Plus, we also recommend that parents introduce practice tests into their child’s study routine to improve their exam technique.
We specialise in publishing practice exam papers in a similar style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. Our tests help students become familiar with the types of questions that they may be asked on the day. When taken under timed exam conditions, our practice tests can also help improve students’ time management skills.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the Southend High School for Boys 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about Southend High School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Shoeburyness High School, Essex, 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Shoeburyness High School is a co-educational academy located in Southend-on-Sea, Essex. The school educates approximately 1650 students aged between 11 and 18. The school has Technology College status and gained academy status in 2011. A CAD/CAM Centre was also developed the same year. Shoeburyness High School offers a broad range of subjects and offers an extended school service, running extra-curricular activities for Shoeburyness pupils and students from other schools.
11 Plus Exam Information for Shoeburyness High School
Address: Shoeburyness High School, Caulfield Road, Shoeburyness, Essex, SS3 9LL
Admissions Info: schooloffice@shoeburyness.southend.sch.uk, or (01702) 292286
School Type: Co-educational academy
Number of pupils: 1650 (approx.)
Number of places in year 7: 310
Open day date: July
Exam date: September
Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
Shoeburyness High School 11 Plus Admissions
Each year, Shoeburyness High School admits approximately 310 students into Year 7. The school acts as its own admissions authority to ensure that all applicants to the school are considered fairly.
In cases where there are more Year 7 applicants than available places, the school gives priority to children with a statement of special educational needs (SEN), or Education, Health and Care (EHC) places. The school then gives priority to:
- Looked After or previously Looked After children
- Thirty-one pupils on the basis of their performance in the selection test procedure
- Students who live in the catchment area and have a brother or sister at the school
- Children who live in the catchment area
- Students who live outside the catchment area and have a brother or sister at the school
- Children living outside the catchment area
For more information on the school’s admissions process, please visit the admissions pages on their website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Shoeburyness High School
Before applying for a Year 7 place at Shoeburyness High School, parents and pupils are invited to visit the school during its Open Evening, which take place in September. At the event, students and parents will have the chance to meet staff members and some current pupils.
To apply for a Year 7 school place at the school, parents need to complete two forms. Firstly, the CSSE registration form should be completed online at the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) website, here.
Parents then need to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is also available from the CSSE website.
All parents living in Essex need to state their child’s preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), too. This can be completed by hand on the paper form supplied in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.
Please note that only those pupils who have been entered for the test will be considered for admission.
Shoeburyness High School 11 Plus Exam Format
For all schools that are members of the CSSE, including Shoeburyness High School, there is only one selection test. This ensures that students don’t need to sit several tests for all the schools listed on their preference form.
Applicants are judged on their performance in two tests that cover English and Maths. The English paper includes questions on comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper contains questions that are based on the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the Shoeburyness High School 11 Plus Exam
Setting aside time to study ahead of competitive entry tests can boost a student’s confidence and improve their performance on exam day.
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing practice exam papers in a similar style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. Our tests help students become familiar with the types of English, maths and verbal reasoning questions that they could be asked in the exam. When our tests are taken under timed exam conditions, they can also help improve a student’s time management skills.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the Shoeburyness High School 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about Shoeburyness High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Established in 1551, King Edward VI Grammar School, also known as KEGS, is a British grammar school with academy status, located in Chelmsford, Essex. The school educates students aged between 11 and 18, with Years 7-11 made up of male students. Years 12 and 13 (sixth form) are co-educational. The school places emphasis on traditional courtesy, as well as personal conduct and respect, while embracing modern educational research.
11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford
Address: King Broomfield Road, Chelmsford, Essex, CM1 3SX, United Kingdom
Admissions Info: office@kegs.org.uk
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 892
Number of places in year 7: 120
Open day date: July
Exam date: September
Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford Plus Admissions
Entry to King Edward VI is determined by student performance in the 11+ exam. The school has a 12.5-mile distance priority policy and reserves 80% of its places for students who live in the local area.
All applicants to the school need be considered ‘in area’ and families need to have been continuously resident at their permanent home address within the priority area between set dates determined by the school.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following over-subscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Boys with the top 120 scores in the selection test that live within the priority area.
- The top 30 boys in the selection test regardless of where they live.
- Children of returning UK service personnel and crown servants.
- Remaining pupils in rank order of their scores in the 11 Plus.
- In the case of a tie break, priority is given to Looked After, and previously Looked After children.
For more information on King Edward VI Chelmsford’s admissions policy, please visit the admissions page on the school website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford
Before applying for a Year 7 place at King Edward VI, parents and students are encouraged to visit the school during one of its ‘tour days’, which take place March and July.
In order to register for a Year 7 place, parents need to complete two forms.
The first form is the registration form, which can be completed online at the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) website, here.
Parents also need to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is also available from the CSSE website.
Additionally, all parents living in Essex need to state their preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), which can be completed by hand on the paper form supplied in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.
Please note that only boys who have been entered for the test will be considered for admission.
King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford 11 Plus Exam Format
For all schools that are members of the CSSE, there is one selection test. This ensures that students don’t need to sit several tests for all the schools listed on their preference form.
Entry to King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford is determined by student performance in two papers, covering English and Maths. The English paper focuses on comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper contains questions based on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford 11 Plus Exam
At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation can go a long way to boosting a student’s confidence before an exam. We specialise in publishing practice exam papers in a similar style to those used in the CSEE 11 Plus exam. Our practice tests help students become familiar with the types of questions that they may be asked on the day. When taken under timed exam conditions, our practice tests can also help improve students’ time management skills.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the King Edward VI Grammar School 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about King Edward VI Grammar School Chelmsford was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Colchester Royal Grammar School (CRGS) is a state-funded grammar in Colchester, Essex. It was founded in 1206 and educates students aged between 11 and 18. The school has a co-educational sixth form and a scholarship history dating back to the sixteenth century. The sixth form regularly ranks highly at a national level for A-Level results and has previously been ranked 27th in the country for Oxbridge admissions. The school became an academy in 2012 and, the following year, it was recognised as a National Teaching School and a National Support School. Colchester Royal is one of the few state boarding schools in the UK.
11 Plus Exam Information for Colchester Royal Grammar School
Address: Colchester Royal Grammar School, Lexden Road, Colchester CO3 3ND
Admissions Info: office@crgs.co.uk
School Type: Boys’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 813 (approx.)
Number of places in year 7: 120 (approx.)
Open day date: July
Exam date: September
Exam board type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 admission to Colchester Royal Grammar is primarily determined by student performance in the CSSE 11 Plus exam. Admission is open to all students in Essex and testing takes place before application.
In cases where the school is oversubscribed for Year 7 entry, places are offered to the top-scoring 120 boys in the selection tests who have named CRGS as their preferred school. Boys must also meet the relevant criteria under the co-ordinated admissions arrangements to be offered a place at the school.
If two students have equal ranking, preference will be given to Looked After or previously Looked After children, followed by the applicant who lives the closest to the school.
Applications are open to boys who are currently registered in Year 6 and under 12 years of age. The school does not normally admit overage applicants.
For more information on Colchester Royal Grammar School’s admissions process, please take a look at the admissions policy page, or the admissions policy document, which are both on the school website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Colchester Royal Grammar School
Before applying for a Year 7 place at Colchester Royal Grammar School, parents and students are encouraged to visit the school during one of its open days, which usually take place in July. For details of the next event, please see the school’s website.
Parents applying to Colchester Royal Grammar School must register with the CSSE so that their son can take the 11 Plus exam. Registration forms can be completed online at the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (CSSE) website, here.
Parents also need to complete a Supplementary Information Form (SIF), which is also available from the CSSE website.
All parents who are resident in Essex need to state their son’s preferred secondary schools on the Essex Common Application Form (CAF), which can be completed by hand on the paper form supplied in the LEA Secondary School Admission booklet.
Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
Colchester Royal Grammar School follows the same 11 Plus exam format as all CSSE member schools. There is only one selection test to ensure that students don’t need to take a separate exam for each school to which they have applied.
The Colchester Royal Grammar School 11+ consists of two tests, covering English and Maths. The English paper tests for comprehension, grammar and vocabulary skills, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper focuses on topics from the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the Colchester Royal Grammar School 11 Plus Exam
Most students benefit from a little preparation ahead of the 11 Plus. In addition to working from a planned study schedule, at Exam Papers Plus, we’d recommend that students use 11 Plus practice tests. Our practice papers can help boost a student’s confidence before exam day as they provide students with an indication of the types of questions they could be asked.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the Colchester Royal Grammar School 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about Colchester Royal Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus (11+) Exam Assessment and Test Information
11+
Wycombe Abbey is a girls’ independent boarding school set in a 170-acre estate in High Wycombe. When the school was founded in 1896, the first cohort of girls numbered only 40. It now educates around 600 girls aged 11–18.
The school consistently appears at the top of league tables as one of the highest-performing schools in the country based on exam results. In 2017/18, 95.2% of all GCSE entries and 84.3% of all A-level entries achieved A*–A.
Alongside its academic curriculum, the school offers a wide range of recreational activities ranging from dance to bee-keeping.
As a boarding school, Wycombe Abbey promotes mixed-age bedrooms. The Living section of their website provides detailed information about living arrangements and life at the school.
Wycombe Abbey does offer a small number of day places each year.
11 Plus Exam Information for Wycombe Abbey
Address: Wycombe Abbey, High Wycombe, Buckinghamshire, HP11 1PE
County: Buckinghamshire
Admissions info: registrar@wycombeabbey.com, 01494 897008
School Type: Girls’ independent boarding school
Number of Pupils: 600 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7:
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: October (Stage 1) and January (Stage 2)
Exam Type / Board: CEM Select and ISEB Common Entrance
Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus Admissions
Wycombe Abbey holds an Assessment Day in October each year to assess the academic potential and suitability of all applicants wishing to enter Year 7 the following year.
Conditional offers are made subject to scores in 11+ entrance exams, which are held in January.
To be invited to the Assessment Day, your daughter must be registered with Wycombe Abbey by 1st June in the year prior to entry (when they are in Year 5).
For further information on Wycombe Abbey’s admissions procedures, please contact registrar@wycombeabbey.con or 01494 897008.
Scholarships and bursaries are offered by the school.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Wycombe Abbey
To be considered for a place at Wycombe Abbey, you need to register your daughter by sending the school a completed registration form, which can be requested via their website, together with a fee of £250 by 1st June in the year prior to entry (when your daughter is in Year 5).
Before registering for a place at Wycombe Abbey, parents and children are advised to attend one of the school’s open mornings, which take place in June each year. Given the registration deadline, it is worth attending an open morning while your daughter is still in Year 3 or 4. You must book in advance to attend.
Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus Exam Format
There are two stages to the school’s assessment process for 11+ candidates:
Stage 1: Assessment Day (October)
Once registered, students are invited to attend an Assessment Day in October prior to the year of entry (when your daughter is in Year 6).
All candidates will:
- have an individual interview with a senior member of staff
- take part in small group activities with different departments
- sit an online pre-test consisting of verbal, non-verbal and mathematical reasoning (created by a company called CEM).
Following the Assessment Day, conditional offers will be made subject to success in the entrance exams.
Stage 2: Entrance Exams (January)
Candidates who have been made conditional offers will take papers in English, Mathematics and Science in the January of the proposed year of entry (when your daughter in is Year 6). The papers are Common Entrance papers set by the Independent Schools Examination Board (ISEB)
If your daughter attends a school registered with ISEB, her school will enter her for the Common Entrance and administer the exams.
Alternatively, if your daughter’s school is not registered, she must be entered directly with the ISEB (by 1 December) and sit the papers at one of their test centres or at a British Council office.
Firm offers are made by Wycombe Abbey on the basis of performance in the entrance exams. All places must be accepted and a deposit paid by the first Monday in March.
For more information about Wycombe Abbey admissions, the school website has a useful FAQs page.
How to Prepare for the Wycombe Abbey 11 Plus Exam
Stage 1: Assessment Day (October)
The Wycombe Abbey online pre-test is created by a company called CEM. The test is called CEM Select and tests Verbal, Non-verbal and Mathematical (Numerical) Reasoning.
We have a number of CEM practice resources available, which can be used to build confidence ahead of the pre-tests.
Feedback from those who have taken the Wycombe Abbey online pre-test in previous years suggests that the questions in these CEM practice papers provide good preparation for it:
11+ Comprehension CEM Pack 1 (Fiction)
11+ Comprehension CEM Pack 2 (Non-fiction)
11+ Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM)
11+ Multiple-Choice Reasoning CEM
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning CEM
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning CEM
Stage 2: Entrance Exams (January)
Our online practice papers for independent school entrance exams can be used to help identify any weaker areas in English and Mathematics that require additional work before the ISEB Common Entrance exams. Whilst we would recommend using the following practice papers, please note that they are designed to be challenging and may assess certain topics beyond the requirements of the ISEB 11+ Common Entrance Syllabus:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about Wycombe Abbey was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Sevenoaks School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Selective Entrance Test Information
11+
Sevenoaks is a co-educational day and boarding school for 11 to 18 year olds. Surrounded by a 100-acre campus, the school is located in the Kent countryside.
Sevenoaks’ curriculum is built around the International Baccalaureate. The school says of its learning and character: ‘We are modern, progressive, unstuffy, co-educational and international, and so is the education we provide.’
Sevenoaks was rated ‘exceptional’ for teaching and learning in its most recent ISI report and won The Sunday Times Independent School of the Year Award for 2018.
No boarding is available in Years 7 and 8.
11 Plus Exam Information for Sevenoaks School
Address: Sevenoaks School, Sevenoaks, Kent, TN13 1HU
County: Kent
Admissions info: regist@sevenoaksschool.org, 01732 467703
School Type: Co-educational independent day and boarding school
Number of Pupils: 1080 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 80
Open Day Date: September and June
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Sevenoaks School 11 Plus Admissions
Up to 80 children are admitted to Year 7 of Sevenoaks School, into four parallel forms. The school usually receives around three applicants for every place available.
The school is strongly academic and looks for students who will flourish in a fast-paced environment. All 11+ applicants are assessed through:
- competitive entrance tests in Maths, English and Verbal Reasoning
- a group interview
- a reference from a previous school.
The selection process is designed to identify students who are able to benefit from Sevenoaks School’s approach to learning and who will make a positive contribution towards the life of the school.
Academic and music scholarships are available at 11+. Details of the procedures and criteria for all scholarships can be found on the school’s website.
Sevenoaks also has a bursary programme. Bursaries are means-tested in accordance to the criteria published on the school’s website.
A copy of the full Sevenoaks admission policy can be downloaded from the school website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Sevenoaks School
Before applying for a place at Sevenoaks School, parents and children are advised to attend one of the school’s open mornings, which are held in September and June. The June open morning is the larger event and attendance should be booked in advance.
For admission into Year 7 at Sevenoaks, application should be made by 1st September of the year prior to entry using the online application form. The registration fee, which is non-refundable, is £100.
Reports will be requested from applicants’ schools in October and the entrance exams and interviews will take place in January. Results are sent out by email in mid-February.
The school has put together a list of frequently asked questions about entry at 11+ and a comprehensive booklet about the application process, timings and fees called ‘The Detail’, which can be downloaded from their website.
For further information on admissions to Sevenoaks School, please contact: regist@sevenoaksschool.org or 01732 467703.
Sevenoaks School 11 Plus Exam Format
The Sevenoaks entrance exam consists of three tests: English, Maths and Verbal Reasoning.
English (1 hour)
- No dictionaries allowed.
- Section A (35 minutes): comprehension
- Section B (25 minutes): creative writing / composition
- All answers must be written in full sentences, paying attention to both spelling and punctuation.
Maths (1 hour)
- No calculators allowed.
- The paper is a general test in mathematics and problem solving. A list of topics covered can be downloaded from the school’s website. It covers a fairly wide range of topics that most 10-year olds should have come across, including:
- addition, subtraction, multiplication and division of whole numbers, fractions and decimals
- directed numbers
- number sequences
- simple percentages
- ratio
- problem solving with fractions and integers
- balance equations
- angle properties
- areas
- volumes of prisms
- symmetry
- averages and range
- distance
- Candidates should show all their working. They may be awarded marks for correct working even if their final answer is incorrect, and an unsupported correct answer may not receive full marks.
Verbal Reasoning (1 hour)
- Questions will be similar to those featured on GL Assessment (NFER) Verbal Reasoning papers.
In addition, there is a 40-minute group interview. During the interviews, candidates are given tasks to complete in small groups of five or six. They will be observed by two members of staff, who are looking for candidates who are good team-players and are willing to contribute ideas and listen to others. No preparation is necessary.
How to Prepare for the Sevenoaks School 11 Plus Exam
Our practice papers can be used to prepare for all aspects of Sevenoaks School’s 11+ entrance exam. They are designed to challenging to reflect the demands of a competitive 11+ independent school’s entrance exam. The papers provide practice in all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam and help build confidence.
To prepare for the Sevenoaks School 11+ Mathematics paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the Sevenoaks School 11+ English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension, spelling and vocabulary:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
The following practice papers will provide useful preparation for the Sevenoaks 11+ Verbal Reasoning paper:
The information provided about Sevenoaks School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Oxford High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Selective Admissions Assessments Information
11+
Oxford High School is an independent day school for girls aged 4–10 years. Founded over 140 years ago, it is Oxford’s oldest girls’ school.
The school is set over three sites in the heart of Oxford, all within a short walk of each other.
The school achieves consistently high academic results at GCSE and A Level and is the only Senior School in Oxford to have been rated ‘exceptional’ by ISI.
Oxford High School is part of the Girls’ Day School Trust (GDST), a charity that owns and runs a network of 25 schools and academies in England and Wales.
The Year 7 Handbook on the school’s website covers everything new students need to know about the school.
11 Plus Exam Information for Oxford High School
Address: Oxford High School, Belbroughton Road, Oxford, OX2 6XA
County: Oxfordshire
Admissions info: admissions@oxf.gdst.net, 01865 318500
School Type: Girls’ independent day school
Number of Pupils: 900 (approx.)
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: November
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Oxford High School 11 Plus Admissions
An admissions and taster day is held in November for all girls registered for Year 7 (11+) entry to Oxford High School. On the day, students sit test papers in English, Maths and Reasoning. They also take part in Science sessions and can get involved in Art, Drama, Music and PE. activities. The activities do not form any part of the assessment process.
All girls attending the admissions day are invited to attend an interview in the following week. Interviews are with the Head or another senior member of staff.
Offers of places at Oxford High School are made on the basis of assessment results, the interview and a reference from the candidate’s current school. They will be made in December. The Girls’ School Association agrees a common deadline for acceptances. Some candidates may not receive immediate offers but may be advised that they have been placed on the waiting list.
A copy of the school’s full admissions policy can be downloaded from its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Oxford High School
The deadline for registering for Year 7 (11+) entry to Oxford High School is in October of the year prior to entry (while your daughter is in Year 6). The registration form can be downloaded from the school’s website. The registration fee is £100 (£150 for non-UK residents).
If you intend to apply for a bursary, you must tick the bursaries box on the registration form.
All girls entered for the Year 7 (11+) test are entered for the academic scholarships. The scholarships are awarded based on performance in the admissions assessments and interview. A separate application should be made for Art, Drama, Music and Sport scholarships.
A Senior School Open Evening is held in October to which all girls currently registered for entry are invited with their parents or guardians. All visitors are welcomed without the need for prior booking. Details are advertised in the local press and published on the school website. Parents may also arrange to visit the school with their daughter at a Meet the Headmaster event, held regularly during term time (booking in advance is required), or on any week-day during term time by prior arrangement.
For further information on Oxford High School’s admissions procedures, please contact the Admissions Registrar or the Director of Admissions: admissions@oxf.gdst.net or 01865 318500.
Oxford High School 11 Plus Exam Format
Oxford High School sets its own papers in:
- English
- Maths
- Reasoning, including verbal and non-verbal reasoning (multiple choice).
The papers are written by the Heads of Department and the Deputy Head. The school does not publish any of its past papers.
How to Prepare for the Oxford High School 11 Plus Exam
Oxford High School does not disclose any information about the content of its assessment papers nor does it publish past papers. As a result, your daughter will understandably feel nervous about sitting the admissions assessments.
Our practice papers can be used to build confidence before the assessments. They cover all the key skills and are designed to be challenging to reflect the demands of a competitive independent school’s 11+ entrance exam.
The papers can be used to provide practice in key skills and identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the assessments.
For students preparing for the Oxford High School 11+ admission assessments, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Oxford High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Magdalen College School (MCS) 11 Plus (11+) Entrance Exam Information
11+
Magdalen College School, founded in 1480, is an independent day school for boys aged 7–18 with a co-educational sixth form.
The school consistently achieves high exam results and, in 2018, 84% of A-level entries and 96% of GCSE entries achieved A*–A.
The quality of pupils’ academic and other achievements at Magdalen College School and the quality of pupils’ personal development were both deemed ‘excellent’ by the Independent Schools Inspectorate (ISI) during its most recent inspection in 2017.
Sport plays an important part of life at Magdalen College School and its location in Oxford means that it has access to a range of first-class college and university sports facilities. Sports scholarships are available at 13+ and 16.
11 Plus Exam Information for Magdalen College School
Address: Magdalen College School, Oxford, OX4 1DZ
County: Oxfordshire
Admissions info: registrar@mcsoxford.org, 01865 253430.
School Type: Independent day school for boys
Number of Pupils: 900 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: Unknown
Open Day Date: Throughout year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Magdalen College School 11 Plus Admissions
Candidates take tests in English composition (fiction and non-fiction), Mathematics and Verbal Reasoning. After the tests, most candidates are invited back for an interview.
In assessing applicants, the school looks for potential and not just current attainment. The school’s exam papers and interviews are designed to explore the way in which each candidate thinks so that i can assess overall promise. They also take into consideration a reference from the pupil’s current school, the wider interests of the pupil and any other applicable information.
Bursaries, scholarships, exhibitions, All-Rounder Awards and Governors’ Presentation Awards are available. Further information can be found on the Scholarships page of the school’s website.
The school has put together a booklet of admissions information, which can be downloaded from its website. The school’s Admissions Policy is also available to download.
For further information on Magdalen College School’s admissions procedures, please contact the registrar, Mrs Barberine Mallett, at registrar@mcsoxford.org or 01865 253430.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Magdalen College School
Before applying for a place at Magdalen College School, you are advised to attend one of the school’s open mornings or afternoons, which take place throughout the year.
You must register your son for the entrance exam. A registration form can be downloaded from the school’s website. The completed registration for must be received by the school by the end of October in the year preceding entry.
In November, Magdalen College School will email all those who have registered for the entrance exam, formally inviting candidates to attend. This email contains a reply slip for parents / guardians to complete and return. A second email providing details of the day itself, including the timings of the different tests, is sent in December.
Magdalen College School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ entrance exam is held at the school in January of the year of entry. It consists of three tests:
Verbal Reasoning
- 45 minutes
- written responses (no multiple-choice questions)
- before the test starts there is the opportunity to work through sample questions and answers with a member of staff and to raise any queries.
Maths
- 1 hour
- no calculator
- based on the National Curriculum Year 5 Programme of Study, plus some topics from the Year 6 Programme of Study.
English
- 1 hour
- a fiction composition and a non-fiction composition
- there is a choice of questions within each section
- attention is paid to spelling, punctuation, handwriting, as well as ability to write lucidly and effectively and with creativity and flair.
Candidates are invited back for an interview on the basis of their performance in the entrance exam. Interviewees will be asked to read and comment on a short passage and to take an object to talk about. The interview lasts about 30 minutes.
An information sheet about the school’s 11+ entrance exam is available on their website.
How to Prepare for the Magdalen College School 11 Plus Exam
Our practice papers cover all the key skills for English, Maths and Verbal Reasoning. They are designed to challenging to reflect the demands on an 11+ independent school’s entrance exam. They can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work and help build confidence before the exam.
For the Magdalen 11+ Verbal Reasoning test, we would recommend the following resources:
For students preparing for the Magdalen College School 11+ Mathematics paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
For students preparing for the Magdalen College School 11+ English paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers to help improve spelling, vocabulary and writing skills:
The information provided about Magdalen College School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) Entrance Exam Information
11+
Founded in 1883, King Edward VI High School for Girls is in Edgbaston, within easy reach of Birmingham city centre. The school has approximately 570 students aged 11 to 18. It is governed by the trustees of ‘The Schools of King Edward VI in Birmingham’ charity, which is also responsible for seven other local schools.
King Edward VI High School for Girls offers a wide range of extra-curricular activities alongside its academic curriculum, with excellent facilities for sport, music, drama and art. In June 2018, the school was featured in an article on ‘Ten of the best value private schools in the UK’, published by The Telegraph.
11 Plus Exam Information for King Edward VI High School for Girls
Address: King Edward VI High School for Girls, Edgbaston Park Road, Birmingham, West Midlands, B15 2UB
County: West Midlands
Admissions info: admissions@kehsmail.co.uk, 0121 415 2195
School Type: Girls’ independent
Number of Students: 570 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 96 (approx.)
Open Day Date: June
Exam Date: October
Exam Type / Board: Set by school
King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
There are approximately 96 places available each year in the Thirds (Year 7) at King Edward VI High School for Girls. Places are allocated based on the school’s own entrance exam, which takes place at the beginning of October in the year before entry.
The school does not interview all candidates; those called for interview are mainly those being considered for scholarship.
Results of applications are normally posted to parents on 1st December.
A document addressing frequently asked questions about the admissions process has been put together by the school and can be downloaded from their Admissions Overview page.
For further information on the King Edward VI High School for Girls application process, contact the registrar, Catherine Oakes, on 0121 415 2195 or admissions@kehsmail.co.uk .
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to King Edward VI High School for Girls
Before applying for a place at King Edward VI High School for Girls, parents and children are advised to attend the school’s open day, which takes place in June. If unable to attend the open day, parents can contact the registrar, Catherine Oakes, by email (admissions@kehsmail.co.uk) to arrange a school tour and discuss any questions they may have about the admissions process.
Parents must register their child for the King Edward VI High School for Girls entrance exam. Registration opens at Easter and closes in September, two weeks before the entrance exam. The registration form is placed on the school’s website when registration opens.
A music scholarship is available to Year 7 students. Pupils who score highly in the 11 Plus exam, and who are a Grade 6 or above in their instrument, will be invited to audition. The application for the Music Scholarship should be submitted with the registration form.
Funding for a number of Governors’ Assisted Places (GAPs) is provided by a grant from the governors. Assisted places are awarded on academic merit based on performance in the entrance exam. They are means-tested, based on family income and assets. Demand is high, so not all candidates who perform well in the exam and apply for an assisted place will be funded. Parents must indicate interest in an assisted place on the registration form.
King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
The entrance exam consists of two English papers and one Mathematics paper.
Both English papers test reading and writing skills. Previous tests have focused on poems, images and prose. Tasks have included comprehension questions, as well as opportunities for creative writing and personal responses to the stimulus materials.
The Mathematics paper consists of a variety of different question formats designed to test ability in arithmetic. No calculators are allowed. Formal knowledge of algebra and geometry is not required.
How to Prepare for the King Edward VI High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam
Our practice papers are designed to help students and parents identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.
For students studying for the King Edward VI High School for Girls entrance exam, we would highly recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about King Edward VI High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Hampton School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Entrance Exam Information
11+
Hampton School is an independent day school for boys aged 11–18. The school was founded in Hampton upon Thames in 1556/7. It moved to its current location on the Hanworth Road in Hampton in 1939. Today Hampton School is recognised as one of the leading academic boys’ schools in the UK and has over 1200 pupils.
Hampton School is located on a green field site in South West London. The school has excellent facilities, including an all-weather sports ground and a professional performing arts theatre. It is also one of the leaders in the field of ICT in the independent education sector.
The Millennium Boat House is situated on a beautiful stretch of the River Thames and is home to the school’s internationally renowned and highly successful Boat Club.
11 Plus Exam Information for Hampton School
Address: Hampton School, Hampton, Middlesex, TW12 3HD
County: Middlesex
Admissions info: admissions@hamptonschool.org.uk, 0208 979 9273
School Type: Boys’ independent day school
Number of Pupils: 1200 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 130 (approx.)
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Hampton School 11 Plus Admissions
Hampton School is academically selective. Boys wishing to join the school in Year 7 are required to sit the school’s own competitive entrance exam while they are in Year 6.
Alternatively, boys in Year 5 may apply for an advance place for 11+ entry and sit the school’s 10+ entrance exam. The 11+ and 10+ entrance exams use similar principles, but are designed to suit the relevant age group. More information about the 10+ advance place exam can be found on the school’s website.
Applicants who perform well in the 11+ entrance exam will be invited to an interview. A report from the Head of the applicant’s current school will also be requested. The aim of the interview is to assess the applicant’s academic capabilities, his hobbies and interests, and his maturity and comprehension.
A copy of the school’s full admissions policy is available on its website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Hampton School
Visitors’ events take place throughout the school year. Parents and students are encouraged to attend (which include a tour of the school and the opportunity to meet with pupils and senior members of staff) prior to applying for admission in order to assess the suitability of the school for their son.
Parents or guardians of all applicants must complete a registration form and pay the £125 non-refundable registration fee by 1st November in the year prior to entry.
All relevant dates for admissions are listed in the ‘Further Information’ booklet within the school’s prospectus and on the school’s website.
Bursaries are available and are means-tested. Scholarships are also available and are awarded on merit irrespective of means. A boy may hold both a bursary and a scholarship.
For further information on admissions to Hampton School, please contact the admissions office: admissions@hamptonschool.org.uk or 0208 979 9273.
Hampton School 11 Plus Exam Format
All 11+ applicants are required to sit the school’s own competitive entrance exam while they are in Year 6. The exam comprises the following written papers:
Mathematics (55 minutes)
English Response and Composition:
- Paper 1: English Comprehension – multiple-choice (25 minutes)
- Paper 2: Composition (35 minutes)
Words and Reasoning (40 minutes)
How to Prepare for the Hampton School 11 Plus Exam
Our practice papers can be used to prepare for all aspects of Hampton School’s 11+ entrance exam. They are designed to challenging to reflect the demands of a competitive 11+ independent school’s entrance exam. The papers provide practice in all the key skills and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam and help build confidence.
To prepare for the Hampton School 11+ Mathematics paper, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
To prepare for the Hampton School 11+ English Response and Composition papers, we would recommend using the following practice papers, which will help to improve comprehension (in the multiple-choice format favoured by Hampton), spelling, punctuation, writing skills and vocabulary:
11+ English Pack 1 (MC)
11+ English Pack 2 (MC)
11+ English Pack 3 (MC)
11+ Punctuation (MC)
The following practice papers will provide useful preparation for the Hampton School Words and Reasoning paper:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Hampton School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Guildford High School 11 Plus (11+) Admissions and Entrance Exam Information
11+
Guildford High School is an academically selective, independent day school for girls aged 4–18. It was founded by the Church Schools Company in 1888 and moved to its current site, close to the town centre of Guildford, in 1893. Today, the school has around 980 girls and belongs to the United Church Schools Trust (UCST), part of the United Learning.
Guildford High School’s mission is ‘to provide a first-class education for academically able girls’ and nationally-standardised test data shows that the ability of the girls at the school is well above average.
The Guildford High School website gives a good overview of the school’s ethos, curriculum and extra-curricular opportunities.
11 Plus Exam Information for Guilford High School
Address: Guildford High School, London Road, Guildford, Surrey, GU1 1SJ
County: Surrey
Admissions info: guildford-admissions@guildfordhigh.co.uk, 01483 562 475
School Type: independent day school for girls
Number of Students: 980 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 100
Open Day Date: Throughout the year
Exam Date: January
Exam Type / Board: School’s own
Guilford High School 11 Plus Admissions
There are approximately 100 places available in Year 7 at Guildford High School. Typically, around 40 of these places go to girls already at the school and the rest go to girls joining the school at 11+.
Guildford High School operates a selective admissions procedure. Decisions about whether to offer a candidate a place are made based on the results of an entrance exam, an interview and references from prior schools.
A copy of the schools admission policy can be downloaded from their website.
For further information about Guildford High School’s admission procedures, contact 01483 543 853 or guildford-admissions@guildfordhigh.co.uk.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Guilford High School
Before applying for a place at Guildford High School, you are advised to attend one of the visitors’ mornings held regularly throughout the year. Booking is required.
You may register your daughter at any time but, in order to take the entrance exam for a Year 7 place, she must be registered by 1st November before the year of intended entry. A non-refundable registration fee of £100 is payable.
A copy of the school’s registration form can be downloaded from its website.
United Learning Assisted Places are available at 11+. These places are awarded on the basis of financial need. To be considered for an Assisted Place, an Assisted Place Application Form should be requested from the Admissions Office prior to the entrance assessment.
At 11+, Academic Scholarships worth up to a third of the fees are awarded on the basis of the entrance exam and interviews. All candidates attending the main entrance assessment day are automatically considered and there is no separate scholarship exam.
Music Scholarships are open to girls who have satisfied the normal academic entrance requirements and have reached Grade 4–5 for their orchestral instrument. Their playing should be of Distinction quality. The auditions take place in January.
A document containing further information about Scholarships at Guildford High School and the Assisted Place Scheme can be downloaded from the school’s website.
Guilford High School 11 Plus Exam Format
The 11+ entrance exam consists of written papers in English and Mathematics. The papers are designed to assess the ability and skills of all candidates, regardless of what they might have covered in the past. It is the schools policy not to issue past papers.
Each candidate also has a one-to-one interview on the day of the entrance exam.
Decisions about whether to offer a candidate a place are made based on the entrance exam, interview and references from prior schools. Offers are typically made within two weeks of the entrance exam. Parents then have a few weeks to make a final decision.
For more information on Guildford High School and the school’s admission process, the school website has a useful FAQs page.
How to Prepare for the Guilford High School 11 Plus Exam
Guildford High School does not disclose any information about the content of its exam papers nor does it publish past papers. As a result, your daughter may understandably feel nervous about sitting the entrance exam.
Our practice papers can be used to build confidence before the exam. They cover all the key skills for English and Mathematics at an appropriate level for 11+ independent schools’ entrance exams and can be used to identify any weaker areas that require additional work.
For students preparing for the Guildford High School 11+ entrance exam, we would recommend using the following practice papers:
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ English (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 1
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 2
11+ Mathematics (Independent Schools) Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Mental Arithmetic
The information provided about Guildford High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
11 Plus: Writing Prompts for both independent and grammar school exams
11+
11+ (11 plus) GL and Pretest exams – Spelling Pack 3 – What you need to know
11+
Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) CSSE Exam Information
11+
Colchester County High School for Girls is a selective grammar school in Colchester, in Essex. Founded in 1909, the school consistently ranks well in exam league tables. The school has academy status and was one of the first Science Specialist Schools in the UK. Colchester County High is also a Modern Language school and offers a range of language subjects.
For an insight into what it’s like to study at Colchester County High, take a look at this Year 7 welcome film, created by the school.
11 Plus Exam Information for Colchester County High School for Girls
Address: Colchester County High School for Girls, Norman Way, Colchester, CO3 3US
County: Essex
Admissions Info: office@colchestergirls.essex.sch.uk, 01206 576973
School Type: Girls’ Grammar
Number of pupils: 783 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: Approximately 140
Open Day Date: July
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: CSSE (Essex 11 Plus)
Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
Colchester County High School for Girls admits students based on the criteria set out by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex (the CSSE). The CSSE takes responsibility for the administration of the test. There is one selection exam, split over two tests that determines Year 7 entry and the same exam is used by all the schools in the Essex consortium. In order to be eligible to sit the exam, girls need to be registered with the CSSE ahead of time.
In cases where there are more eligible candidates than school places, the school uses its over-subscription criteria, which gives priority to Looked After Children, or children who have previously been in looked after care.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Colchester County High School for Girls
In order to apply for Year 7 entry to the school, parents need to register their daughter for the 11 Plus exam. The registration form can be found on the CSSE website, here. Parents also need to complete a Supplementary Information Form. The school encourages prospective students and their parents to visit the school for a daytime tour in July, where they will have the opportunity to meet staff and attend a talk by the Headteacher. Only girls who meet the admission criteria and meet the standard required in the exam will be eligible for entry.
Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
Entry to Colchester County High School for Girls is determined by student performance in two tests, covering English and Mathematics. The English paper tests comprehension, grammar and vocabulary, as well as creative writing, verbal reasoning and literacy.
The Maths paper tests students on topics contained within the KS2 National Curriculum.
The test scores are age-standardised to ensure that older pupils don’t have an unfair advantage.
How to Prepare for the Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
Our practice exam papers can help familiarise students with the types of questions they may be asked on the day. Furthermore, when taken under exam conditions, our practice papers can help improve time management and get students used to answering questions under pressure.
The Colchester County High School for Girls 11 Plus exam is set by the Consortium of Selective Schools in Essex. At Exam Papers Plus, we produce similarly-styled practice papers that can help students prepare for the Essex 11 Plus exam.
We have a number of practice tests specifically designed to help students prepare for the Colchester County High School for Girls 11+ exam. You can learn more about them here.
Full Practice Tests
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 1
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 2
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 3
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 4
11+ Essex (CSSE) Practice Test 5
Further English practice
The CSSE 11+ English paper can include both multiple-choice and open-answer comprehension questions, as well as a writing section and reasoning section.
For multiple-choice comprehension practice, we’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Comprehension (Fiction)
11 Plus Comprehension (Non-fiction)
For open-answer comprehension and writing practice, we’d highly recommend these resources:
11 Plus English Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus English Pack 3 (Open Answer)
For the reasoning section, we’d highly recommend these practice tests:
Further Maths Practice
The CSSE 11+ Maths paper covers the KS2 syllabus (including problem solving and arithmetic) as well as some non-verbal reasoning. The maths questions are not multiple-choice.
We’d highly recommend:
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 1 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 2 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mathematics Pack 3 (Open Answer)
11 Plus Mental Arithmetic (Open Answer)
The information provided about Colchester County High School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Established 1894, St Hilda’s Church of England High School is a co-educational, bilateral school in Sefton Park, Liverpool. The school recently underwent a £15 million refurbishment. St Hilda’s takes pride in its Christian values and aims to nurture positive, respectful relationships. The school produces above average GCSE results and is above the national average for English. St Hilda’s also has a 99.9% A-Level pass rate, with students being accepted into Russell Group universities. The school’s purpose is to inspire its pupils by helping them develop skills that will serve them well in the changing world.
For an insight into what it’s like to study at St Hilda’s, take a look at the school’s recent student recruitment video:
11 Plus Exam Information for St Hilda’s Church of England High School
Address: St Hilda’s Church of England High School, Croxteth Drive, Sefton Park, Liverpool, L17 3AL
County: Merseyside
Admissions Info: info@st-hildas.co.uk, 0151 733 2709
School Type: Co-educational, bilateral high school
Number of pupils: 863 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 170 (25 places through academic selection)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus Admissions
St Hilda’s High School offers several admissions routes. As a Church of England School, it accepts applications from any part of the Diocese of Liverpool.
St Hilda’s doesn’t have a sibling policy, so each student is considered on an individual basis. In the event of a tie-break, the school gives priority to students that live closest to the school. The school offers the following admission routes:
- Students with special educational needs, or a health care plan
- Looked After or previously Looked After children
- Children whose parents are employed by the school
- Christian students (135 places allocated)
- Other world faiths (10 places)
- Students who perform well in the entrance exam (25 places)
- All other applicants
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Hilda’s Church of England High School
Before applying for a Year 7 place at St Hilda’s, parents and prospective students are invited to attend the school’s Open Evening, which takes place in September. At the event, there will be an opportunity to meet staff and students, and tour the school.
After visiting St Hilda’s, parents can obtain a registration form directly from the school. The form must be returned before the October closing date. Parents also need to complete a Local Authority Preference form, stating St Hilda’s as a preference.
Late applications will be accepted but handled after those that have been received on time.
St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus Exam Format
The St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus exam is made up of two papers: verbal reasoning, and non-verbal reasoning. On the day of the tests, there will be a break between the two papers.
In cases where two or more students have equal scores in the exam, preference will be given to those who score highest in the non-verbal reasoning test.
How to Prepare for the St Hilda’s Church of England High School 11 Plus Exam?
We’d recommend that parents help their child create a study schedule that outlines what needs to be studied and when. Mapping out your child’s 11 Plus preparation ensures that all relevant topics are covered before exam day.
In addition to working from a study schedule, students should use 11 Plus practice exam papers to familiarise themselves with the exam layout. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish 11 Plus practice tests that help students identify the types of questions they may be asked on the day. This type of practical preparation is a great way to boost a student’s confidence in the lead up to the exam.
For students preparing for the St Hilda’s Church of England Year 7 entrance exam, we’d recommend the following resources.
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about St Hilda’s Church of England High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Established 1908, St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School is a voluntary-aided catholic school in Finchley, London. St Michael’s architecture draws on a range of different styles, providing a picturesque learning environment. The school’s website states that St Michael’s is distinguished by its quality of education and care.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School
Address: St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School, Nether Street, North Finchley, N12 7NJ
County: London
Admissions Info: office@st-michaels.barnet.sch.uk, 020 8446 2256A
School Type: Girls’ grammar, catholic
Number of pupils: 750 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 96
Open Day Dates: June
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Admissions
St Michael’s catholic education is fully supported by the families whose children attend the school. All applicants are expected to give their full commitment to the school’s aims and values.
Each year, St Michael’s admits 96 students into Year 7. Only girls who demonstrate the necessary academic ability and whose parents wish for them to attend a catholic school will be admitted. St Michael’s is always oversubscribed, and therefore gives priority to students from a practising catholic family who have made their First Holy Communion.
If two or more applicants have equal ranking, priority is given to Looked After or previously Looked After children, followed by students who live closest to the school.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School
In order to apply for a Year 7 place at St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School, parents need to complete the school’s online registration form. A Common Application Form should also be completed and returned to the Local Authority before the deadline date.
A Supplementary Information Form should also be completed. Parents are also asked to write to the school, providing reasons and evidence of why their child would be a good fit.
Additionally, parents are required to complete a Certificate of Catholic Practice form (CCP), previously known as a ‘Priest’s Reference’.
St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam Format
The St Michael’s 11 Plus exam is administered by GL Assessment. All applicants are required to take the following 4 test papers:
- Verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning
- English
- Maths
Places are allocated based on performance in the entrance test with the highest scoring students given priority. In instances of a tie break, students’ scores in the verbal reasoning test are given precedence over scores in the non-verbal reasoning test.
How to Prepare for the St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus Exam?
At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation can go a long way towards improving a student’s exam confidence. We recommend that students preparing for competitive entry tests like the St Michaels’ 11 Plus exam should work from a study schedule.
Parents can help their children by outlining the topics that need to be studied and allocating specific time periods for reviewing each one. The sooner students start preparing for the exam, the more time they’ll have to improve any weaker areas.
In addition to working from a study schedule, 11 Plus practice papers can help improve a student’s exam technique. We specialise in producing practice tests for competitive entry exams like the St Michael’s entrance assessment. Our tests are designed to help students become familiar with the types of questions they may be asked on exam day.
We’d recommend that students take our practice tests under timed exam conditions in order to improve their time management skills as well as their exam technique. Students preparing for the St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School 11 Plus exam will find the following resources particularly useful:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving
The information provided about St Michael’s Catholic Grammar School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Orchard Park High School 11 Plus (11+) Banding Test Information
11+
Previously known as Edenham High School, Orchard Park High School and Sixth Form is a co-educational school in Shirley, Croydon. The school has academy status and is part of the Greenshaw Learning Trust, which is a group of schools that share the same educational values. Orchard Park is rated ‘good’ by Ofsted. The school offers GCSEs, A Levels and a range of further vocational courses.
11 Plus Exam Information for Orchard Park High School
Address: Orchard Park High School, Orchard Way, Shirley, Croydon, CR0 7NJ
County: Greater London
Admissions Info: admin@orchardparkhigh.net, 020 8776 0220
School Type: Mixed secondary
Number of pupils: Confirmation required
Number of Places in Year 7: 180
Open Day Dates: October
Exam Date: December
Orchard Park High School 11 Plus Admissions
Orchard Park High School is an academy in the Greenshaw Learning Trust, which is the admissions authority for the school. Orchard Park’s admissions process is administered by the school in accordance with the Trust’s policies.
Each year, the school admits 180 students into Year 7, giving priority to:
- Looked After or Previously Looked After children
- Students with exceptional social or medical needs
- Pupils who have a parent that works at the school
- Students who live closest to Orchard Park High School
- Students who are in a tie break for places
- All other unallocated places
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Orchard Park High School
Before applying for a Year 7 place at Orchard Park, parents and students are advised to attend one of the school’s Open Mornings, which take place throughout October. The school’s Open Mornings do not include a tour of the school but private appointments to view the campus can be made by emailing admissions@orchardparkhigh.net.
All applicants to the school must complete the Supplementary Information Form (SIF) for entry into Year 7 for September. The form can be downloaded from the school website.
In order to gain entry to the school, every candidate is required to sit a compulsory Ability Banding Test which takes place in December.
Orchard Park High School Banding Test Format
The Orchard Park Banding Test takes place in December for entry to the school the following September. Parents will receive notification of the testing arrangements in November.
The Banding Test consists of two papers:
- A verbal reasoning test
- A non-verbal reasoning test
Both papers last approximately 30 minutes each and scores are age-standardised to ensure that older students don’t have an unfair advantage.
Based on the results of the banding test, students are placed into one of nine ability bands and places are allocated to students against the band in which they are placed. The number of places in each ability band is determined by the total number of applicants.
Offer letters will be sent to parents by the Home Local Authority on National Offer Day. Parents should then accept the offer in writing before the deadline date.
Orchard Park High School doesn’t provide information on individual scores or rankings and doesn’t have an appeals process.
For more information on the school’s Banding Test, please visit the Admissions page, here.
How to Prepare for the Orchard Park High School 11 Plus Banding Test?
When preparing for the Orchard Park High School Banding Test, practice makes perfect. We’d recommend that parents help their children create a detailed study plan that outlines the topics that need to be studied and when.
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing practice tests to help students prepare for competitive entry exams. Our verbal and non-verbal reasoning practice papers are designed to replicate the types of questions that students could be asked on test day.
When taken under timed exam conditions, our tests can help improve students’ time management skills. As they grow in experience, students will become more aware of how long to spend on each question type.
For students preparing for the Orchard Park High School Banding Test, we’d recommend the following resources:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
The information provided about Orchard Park High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Homewood School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Homewood School and Sixth Form Centre is a co-educational academy in Tenterden, Kent. The school educates over 2,500 students and has over 250 staff members. The school provides flexible learning opportunities and operates within the Kent selective system. Homewood is also a Specialist Arts College. The school aims to provide its students with a vibrant, world-class learning experience in partnership with the wider community.
11 Plus Exam Information for Homewood School
Address: Homewood School, Ashford Road, Tenterden, TN30 6LT
County: Kent
Admissions Info: info@homewood.kent.sch.uk, 01580 766267
School Type: Mixed academy
Number of pupils: 2500 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 390 (day places only)
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Kent 11 Plus Test
Homewood School 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 entry to Homewood School is coordinated in conjunction with Kent County Council. In cases where the number of applications exceed available places, the following criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Looked After or Previously Looked After children
- Students who demonstrate high aptitude in the Kent Test (20% of intake, 78 students in total)
- Students who already have a sibling at the school
- Pupils who live closest to the school
For more information on the admissions process at Homewood School, please visit the Kent County Council website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Homewood School
Year 7 applications to Homewood School are handled by the coordinated admission scheme under Kent County Council. Homewood uses the Kent Test to determine admission and parents must register online with the LA in the first instance.
Once students have taken the 11+ Kent Test, parents are required to complete the Common Application Form (CAF) and submit it to the LA. This process can usually be done online. Parents will receive their child’s test results from the Council in October, with offers sent out in March.
Homewood School 11 Plus Exam Format
Twenty percent of Homewood School’s intake (78 pupils) is made with reference to ability or aptitude. All students who register for the Kent Test will be invited to take the assessment.
The Kent Test consists of two multiple-choice tests:
- An hour-long exam that is divided into two sections that cover English and maths. Each section consists of a 5-minute practice exercise and a 25-minute test.
- A 60-minute test that focuses on reasoning. It is divided into three sections: verbal reasoning, non-verbal reasoning and spatial reasoning
Pupils must also complete a 40-minute writing task. However, this does not form part of the final 11 Plus result but is used only in borderline or appeal cases.
How to Prepare for the Homewood School 11 Plus Exam?
Kent is known for being a competitive grammar school region, and most schools are oversubscribed for Year 7 entry. In order for students to have the best chance of gaining one of the 78 places at Homewood School, they should invest additional time into studying and revising in the build-up to the test.
Parents should help their child prepare by creating a study timetable that outlines what topics need to be studied and when.
In addition to working from a study schedule, we recommend that students use practice exam papers to help boost their confidence ahead of the test.
Students who are registered to take the Homewood School entrance test will especially benefit from these practice resources:
Kent Practice Test 1 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 2 (11 Plus)
Kent Practice Test 3 (11 Plus)
These tests are designed to replicate the format, content, structure, question types, style and timings of the actual Kent 11 plus exam.
For additional, subject-specific revision of multiple-choice questions, we would also highly recommend these practice exam papers:
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11 Plus Verbal Reasoning Pack 4 (GL)
11 Plus Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about Homewood School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Greenshaw High School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Selective Eligibility Test Information
11+
Founded in 1967, Greenshaw High School is a co-educational academy in Sutton. The school educates around 1,600 pupils and was originally founded as a comprehensive school. Greenshaw gained academy status in 2011 and, in 2014, was reconstituted as a multi-academy trust, named ‘Greenshaw Learning Trust’. The school is known for having a successful sixth form and has been awarded the Arts Council Silver award, Investor in People, Associate Training School and Health School awards. Greenshaw is currently rated ‘good’ by Ofsted.
11 Plus Exam Information for Greenshaw High School
Address: Greenshaw High School, Grennell Road, Sutton, SM1 3DY
County: Surrey
Admissions Info: admissions@greenshaw.co.uk, 020 8715 1001
School Type: Mixed grammar
Number of pupils: 1600 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 314
Open Day Date: September
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: Selective Eligibility Test (SET)
Greenshaw High School 11 Plus Admissions
Year 7 entry to Greenshaw Academy is coordinated by the London Borough of Sutton. The Greenshaw Learning Trust is the admissions authority for the school and their admission arrangements can be found here.
The school admits 314 students into Year 7 each year, including ‘statemented’ students. Places are allocated under the following criteria:
- Looked After, or previously Looked After Children
- Students with exceptional medical or social needs
- Pupils who demonstrate top performance in the Selective Eligibility Test (up to 60 places available)
- Children of staff members
- Students who have a sibling at the school
- Pupils who live closest to the school
For more information on Greenshaw Academy’s admissions policy, please contact admissions@greenshaw.co.uk, or telephone the Admissions Officer on 020 8715 1001.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Greenshaw High School
Before applying for a place at Greenshaw, parents and students are advised to attend the school’s Open Evening, which takes place in September. The school also runs two Open Mornings in October by appointment only.
In order to apply for a Year 7 place at Greenshaw High School, parents need to complete a Common Application Form (CAF), stating Greenshaw as one of their child’s preferences. The form should be returned to their Local Authority before the closing date. The Sutton CAF is available online, here.
In order to be eligible to take the Greenshaw Academy Selective Eligibility Test, parents need to complete an online application form on the school Admissions page once registration opens. All applicants who complete the registration form will be invited to take the test.
Greenshaw High School 11 Plus Exam Format
In previous years, the Sutton Eligibility Test has been split into two stages:
- Stage 1: Maths and English, both multiple-choice
- Stage 2: Maths and English. Neither of these are multiple-choice and previous exams have included comprehension, a writing task and a standard maths test.
Each test paper includes questions typical to the KS2 national curriculum. It should be noted that success in the test doesn’t automatically mean that a student will be allocated a place.
Notification offers are sent to parents at the end of September and a written acceptance of a place should be received by the closing date. For more information on the Greenshaw Academy Selective Eligibility Test, the school website has a useful FAQs page.
How to Prepare for the Greenshaw High School 11 Plus Exam?
Our online practice papers help students and parents identify any weaker areas that require additional work before the exam.
For students studying for the Greenshaw Selective Eligibility Test, we would recommend using the following practice papers, specifically designed for the S.E.T:
11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 1
11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 2
11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 3
11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 4
11+ Selective Eligibility Test (SET) Practice Test 5
11+ Sutton + Kingston: Prefixes and Suffixes
If you would like further, subject-specific practice, the following papers will prove useful:
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus English Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus English Grammar School Pack 3
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 1
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 2
11 Plus Maths Grammar Schools Pack 3
11 Plus Maths: Problem Solving Grammar Schools
For the second stage, the following maths and English papers will prove useful:
The information provided about Greenshaw High School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Budmouth College 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Budmouth College is the only secondary school in Weymouth & Portland to also have a Sixth Form. Located in Dorset, the school is named after the town of Budmouth in Thomas Hardy’s novels. The school educates over 1,500 students aged between 11 and 18 and offers a range of qualifications. It’s known for producing above average GCSE results. Budmouth has a combined cadet force and offers a range of facilities, including a greenhouse for Science students, ICT suites, and other specialist suites for specific subject areas.
For an insight into what it’s like to study at Budmouth College, take a look at this promotional video:
11 Plus Exam Information for Budmouth College
Address: Budmouth College, Chickerell Road, Weymouth, DT4 9SY
County: Dorset
Admissions Info: budmouth@budmouth.dorset.sch.uk, 01305 830500
School Type: Mixed secondary
Number of pupils: 1,500 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 260 (30 selective places)
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: Late-September
Budmouth College 11 Plus Admissions
Budmouth College has an equal preference policy and considers all applicants who apply for a place on their Common Application Form. Each year, thirty students are admitted to the school based on the results of the Abilities Test. The remaining 260 places are allocated using the following criteria:
- Looked After or Previously Looked After Children
- Children who have a brother or sister who already attends the school
- Children of staff members
- Students who live in the school’s catchment area or attend Portesham Primary School
- Other applicants
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Budmouth College
For more information on how to apply to Budmouth College, the school website directs parents to the Dorset Local Authority website, which outlines the following application process:
- Applicants who live in Dorset should apply for a Dorset school reception place via their Local Authority.
- Applicants who live in Dorset and want to apply for a school place in another Local Authority area should still apply directly to the Dorset Local Authority.
- It’s advised that parents read the Local Authority’s Parent’s Guide for more information on the different types of schools available.
- Parents should read the admissions policies for the individual school’s they want to apply to.
Please note that parents may have to complete an additional form to apply to religious schools.
The application form to apply to a Dorset school can be completed online here, and the application to apply for the Dorset Test can be found here.
Budmouth College 11 Plus Exam Format
Each year, 30 students are admitted to Budmouth College based on academic ability. The tests are all taken online and begin with a five-minute practice session. The aim of the entrance test is to identify students who have high academic targets for GCSE and have a ‘faster pace and greater depth of learning’. There are three test papers that consist of the following question types:
- Verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning
- Quantitative (mathematical) reasoning
Test results are sent to parents in mid-October. It should be noted that achieving a qualifying score doesn’t guarantee a place at Budmouth College. Students who don’t gain a place via the Ability Test will still be considered via the school’s remaining criteria.
How to Prepare for the Budmouth College 11 Plus Exam?
Performing well in competitive entry exams like the Budmouth College Ability Test is all about preparation. We suggest that parents help their students create a revision timetable that outlines what needs to be studied before the test. By breaking down each topic into manageable sections, students won’t feel as overwhelmed with the practice that they need to put in.
In addition to working from a planned study timetable, we recommend that students introduce practice exam papers into their routine. At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing practice tests for competitive entry exams like the Budmouth College Abilities Test.
When taken under exam conditions, our practice papers can be a great way of improving a student’s confidence. They’ll become familiar with the types of questions that could come up on the day of the exam, and they’ll have a good idea of how each test will be laid out. For students preparing for the Budmouth College 11 Plus exam, we’d recommend the following resources:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving
The information provided about Budmouth College was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Archbishop Tenison’s School (Oval) 11 Plus (11+) Banding Test Information
11+
Founded in 1685, Archbishop Tenison’s Church of England School, known locally as Tenison’s, is a co-educational, voluntary-aided school in Lambeth, London. The school educates around 530 pupils, and is a Specialist Arts College. Tenison’s is located across from The Oval cricket ground, home to Surrey County Cricket Club. The school produces above average GCSE results.
11 Plus Exam Information for Archbishop Tenison’s School
Address: Archbishop Tenison’s School, 55 Kennington Oval, London, SE11 5SR
County: London – Lambeth
Admissions Info: school@ats.lambeth.sch.uk, 020 7793 8519
School Type: Mixed secondary
Number of pupils: 530 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 92
Open Day Date: TBC
Exam Date: Mid-November
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Archbishop Tenison’s School 11 Plus Admissions
Each year, Archbishop Tenison’s admits 92 students into Year 7. The school aims to have a balanced intake of boys and girls. Seventy percent of places are allocated to students under the Foundation criteria, for children from worshipping Anglican families and other Christian denominations. The remaining 30% of places are allocated under the school’s Open Admissions criteria.
In both the Foundation and Open criteria, ability banding is applied with spaces filled based on a specific set of criteria.
Under the Foundation criteria, if there are more applicants than available places, the following oversubscription policy is used, giving priority to:
- Looked After or Previously Looked After children
- Students from worshipping Anglican families
- Children from other Christian denominations
- Pupils who already have a sibling at the school
- Students who live closest to the school
Under the Open Admission criteria, the oversubscription policy gives priority to:
- Looked After or Previously Looked After children
- Students with medical or social needs
- Students from each of the parishes of St Martin-in-the Fields and St James’s, Piccadilly (up to 5 places)
- Pupils who already have a sibling at the school
- Students who live closest to the school
Parents can learn more about the school’s admissions process in their admissions policy document.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Archbishop Tenison’s School
Before applying for a Year 7 place at Archbishop Tenison’s, the school recommends that parents do two things. Firstly, they should read the school prospectus to learn more about the school’s values, and secondly, they should attend one of the Open Days to visit the school and meet current staff and students.
Once parents and students have visited the school, the Common Application Form (CAF) should be completed and returned to the Local Authority. Archbishop Tenison’s School must be named on the CAF as one of the preferences.
A Supplementary Information Form (SIF) should also be completed and returned to enable the school to register all applicants to sit the Lambeth Banded Admissions Test in November.
Archbishop Tenison’s School 11 Plus Banding Test Format
All Year 7 applicants who apply through the secondary transfer process are required to take a standardised banding test that consists of three papers:
- Verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning
- Numeracy
The tests are administered by GL Assessment and are known collectively as the Lambeth Banded Admissions Test. The same testing format is used across the majority of secondary schools in Lambeth. The tests are designed to ensure a balanced intake of children.
Once the tests have been scored, students are placed in one of three ability bands:
- Band A: Above average
- Band B: Average
- Band C: Below average
The school aims to admit 30% of students from band A, 50% from band B, and 20% from band C.
How to Prepare for the Archbishop Tenison’s School 11 Plus Banding Test?
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing practice test papers for entrance exams like the Lambeth Banded Admissions Test. Each of our papers come complete with answers, so parents can track their child’s progress as they go.
In order to get the most out of our 11 Plus practice test papers, we recommend that students take the tests under timed, exam conditions. If your child is taking the Archbishop Tenison’s School test, we’d recommend the following resources if you’d like them get an idea of the type of questions they may be asked:
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1
11+ Mathematics: Problem Solving
The information provided about Archbishop Tenison’s School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Graveney School Year 6 Wandsworth Test: 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Founded in 1986, Graveney School is a partially-selective secondary school and sixth form located in Tooting. The school has academy status and, in previous years, has been rated as ‘outstanding’ by Ofsted. The school prides itself on providing a disciplined atmosphere for pupils to learn. Graveney aims to produce confident, responsible adults who will make a positive contribution to society.
For a short tour of the school grounds, take a look at this drone video:
Wandsworth Test Information for Graveney School
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Graveney School Year 6 Test
Before registering for a Year 7 place at Graveney School, students and parents are encouraged to attend one of the Open Days, which take place during the summer and autumn months. The events give students the opportunity to tour the school and attend talks by the Principal and Deputies. The school currently doesn’t provide private tours.
For more information on Graveney School’s Open Days, please visit this page on the school’s website.
After taking the Wandsworth Year 6 Test, all candidates need to submit an online application through their Local Authority’s website, or complete a Common Application Form from their LA.
The CAF is completed after the Year 6 test so that the school already has prior information about each pupil’s academic ability before allocating places. Students who don’t attend a Wandsworth school need to register through their LA to be invited to a test session.
Graveney School Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria
Each year, Graveney School admits around 280 pupils, of which 70 places are allocated to those who score highest in the Wandsworth Test. In cases where there are less than 70 applicants through the selective stream, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria to determine place priority:
- Looked After or previously Looked After children
- Students who already have a sibling at the school
- Students with an exceptional medical or social need
- Children of school staff members
- Students who live closest to the school
Graveney School, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
All applicants to Graveney School take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test, which consists of two papers:
- Verbal reasoning (50 minutes long)
- Non-verbal reasoning (55 minutes long)
The 70 places offered at Graveney are given to those that score the highest in the Year 6 test. The test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and is designed to provide schools with an indication of a students’ academic ability.
Both the verbal and non-verbal reasoning tests are laid out in a multiple-choice format and are marked electronically. Test results are age-standardised and emailed to parents in October.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Practice Papers for the Graveney School Year 6 Test
In addition to working from a planned study schedule, students can improve their chances of performing well in the Graveney School Year 6 Test by using practice papers.
At Exam Papers Plus, we publish resources that help students prepare for competitive entry tests, like the Graveney School Wandsworth Test. Our practice papers help familiarise students with the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they could be asked in the GL Assessment exam.
Below, we’ve listed the most relevant resources for students preparing for the Graveney School entry test. These practice tests should help give students the confidence boost they need ahead of exam day. Each practice test includes answers and should ideally be taken under exam conditions.
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 4 (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within this post.
Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Wandsworth Test: 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Established in 1970, Ernest Bevin College is a secondary college for boys with a co-educational sixth form. Located in Tooting, London, the college educates around 1,173 students. Ernest Bevin is a Specialist College for Sport with a specialism in Maths and Computing. The college has also been awarded STEM assured status for its teaching in Science, Technology, Engineering, and Maths. The college is known for its focus on sport and competes at local and national level in various sporting disciplines. Ernest Bevin prides itself on its multi-cultural environment and dedicated teaching staff.
For an insight into what it’s like to study at Ernest Bevin College, take a look at this short video:
Wandsworth Test Information for Ernest Bevin College
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Test
The college encourages students and parents to visit before registering for a Year 7 place. Open days take place throughout the summer and autumn terms where attendees will have the chance to tour the school and meet staff members. Private visits to the college can also be arranged by contacting the school on 020 8672 8582 or by emailing fwilkins@ernestbevin.london.
Students applying to Ernest Bevin College through its selective stream need to take the Wandsworth Test before completing the Common Application Form. The CAF can be completed online, here. Late applications will be accepted but will only be considered after the initial offer date.
For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.
Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria
Each year, Ernest Bevin admits 180 boys into Year 7. Sixty of those places are allocated to students who achieve the highest scores in the Wandsworth Test.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places under the selective stream, the college uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Boys with a Statement of Special Educational Needs.
- Boys with a Health Care Plan that names Ernest Bevin College.
For more information on the college’s full oversubscription criteria, please see the school’s admissions policy.
Ernest Bevin College, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
Ernest Bevin College uses the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of its selective admissions process. The test is designed to provide the school with an indication of each student’s academic ability. Selective places are then awarded to students with the highest scores.
The Wandsworth test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and includes a non-verbal reasoning test (55 minutes long), and a verbal reasoning test (50 minutes long).
Students will have the chance to take a short practice session before the exam begins. There will also be a break between the two tests. Both papers are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in multiple-choice format. Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Test results are emailed to parents in October and offers are sent out in March. After accepting a place at the college, students and parents are invited to attend a non-academic interview. After the interview, students can ask any questions they have about the college, order their uniform, and meet their form tutor and class mates.
Practice Papers for the Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Test
When used alongside a planned study schedule, practice papers can go a long way to increasing a student’s exam confidence. At Exam Papers Plus, we publish resources for competitive entry exams like the Ernest Bevin College Wandsworth Test.
Our practice papers are designed to provide students with an insight into the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they may be asked in these competitive entry exams. They also help students become familiar with the layout of the tests.
We’ve listed our most relevant resources for the Ernest Bevin College Year 6 Test below. These practice tests should give students the confidence boost they need ahead of test day. Each test includes full answers and should be taken under exam conditions.
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 4 (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within the post.
Chestnut Grove Academy Year 6 Wandsworth Test: 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Formed as Chestnut Grove School in 1986, Chestnut Grove Academy is a partially-selective secondary school in Balham, London. The school has academy status and was the first Arts College in the UK. Previous Ofsted reports have rated the school as ‘outstanding’. The school prides itself on being a vibrant place to learn, where students feel part of a community that promotes social responsibility.
Wandsworth Test Information for Chestnut Grove Academy
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Chestnut Grove Academy Year 6 Test
Before registering for a place at Chestnut Grove, students and parents are encouraged to visit the school during one of its Open Events, which are held throughout the academic year. For more information about these events, parents should contact the school’s Admissions Officer on 020 8772 2512, or at admissions@chestnutgrove.wandsworth.sch.uk.
All applicants to Chestnut Grove Academy need to take the Wandsworth Test (in addition to any aptitude tests) before completing the Common Application Form. This is to provide the school with an indication of each student’s current ability.
In order to apply to take the Wandsworth Test, parents should register their child via the Wandsworth Admissions website.
For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.
Chestnut Grove Academy Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria
There are approximately 180 Year 7 places available at Chestnut Grove, with 120 places allocated to students who perform well in the Wandsworth Test. In cases where there are more applicants to the school than there are available places, Chestnut Grove uses the following oversubscription criteria to determine allocation, giving priority to:
- Looked After or previously Looked After children.
- Students with social or medical needs (with supporting professional evidence).
- Students who already have a brother or sister that attends the school.
- Children of current staff.
- Students who live closest to the school.
Chestnut Grove Academy, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
Every applicant to Chestnut Grove is required to take the Wandsworth Test – even those who are applying for a specialist place. The test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and consists of:
- A non-verbal reasoning test that last for 55 minutes
- A verbal reasoning test that lasts for 50 minutes.
Students are given a short practice session before each test and there will be a break between the two papers. Both papers are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in multiple-choice format.
Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised. Based on their test score, students are placed in one of five bands to determine the top performing students. Test results are emailed to parents in October.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Practice Papers for the Chestnut Grove Academy Year 6 Test
At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation goes a long way to making students feel more confident on exam day. We produce resources that help students prepare for competitive entry exams like the Chestnut Grove Academy Wandsworth Year 6 Test.
Our practice papers help students become familiar with the layout of this competitive entry exam. They also provide students with an idea of the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they can expect on the day of their test.
When used alongside a planned study schedule, the resources below can help improve a student’s confidence. Our practice tests cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test. Each practice test includes answers and should be taken under exam conditions:
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 4 (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Wandsworth Test: 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Founded in 2007, Ashcroft Technology Academy is a state secondary school and sixth-form for students aged 11-18 in West Hill, London. In recent years, the school has undergone extensive refurbishment, which includes a purpose-built sixth-form and Autism Resource Centre. The school is named after Lord Michael Ashcroft and is a registered charity. Ashcroft has been awarded the Investors in People, Charter Mark, and the School Achievement Award.
Wandsworth Test Information for Ashcroft Technology Academy
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Test
Before registering for a place at Ashcroft Technology Academy, students and parents are encouraged to visit the school during one of its Open Events which take place at various dates throughout June and September. There are limited spaces for these events and parents are asked to express their interest by email at admissions@ashcroftacademy.org.uk, or by telephone on 020 8812 3551.
As part of the Wandsworth Schools admissions process, students need to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test before completing a Common Application Form from their Local Authority. The CAF can be completed online, here and although late applications are accepted, they will only be processed after the initial offer date.
For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.
Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria
The trustees of Ashcroft Technology Academy are responsible for admitting students into the school. Each year, 240 students are admitted into Year 7, with 24 students offered a place based on their aptitude for technology.
All students (even those applying through the aptitude test) are required to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. In the first instance, places are offered to students with a Statement of Special Educational Needs or Education Health and Care Plan. Then, in cases where there are more than 240 Year 7 applicants, the schools uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked After or previously Looked After children.
- Students who already have a brother or sister at the school.
- Students who have a parent that works for the school.
- Those who live closest to the school.
Ashcroft Technology Academy, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
All students who apply to Ashcroft Technology Academy are required to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. The test is designed to provide the school with an indication of each applicant’s academic ability. The Wandsworth Test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and includes two papers:
- A non-verbal reasoning test (55 minutes long)
- A verbal reasoning test (50 minutes long)
Students will have the chance to take a practice session before each test begins. There will also be a break between the two tests. Questions are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in a multiple-choice format.
Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised. Test results are emailed to parents in October.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Practice Papers for the Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Test
When used alongside a dedicated study plan, practice papers can really help boost a child’s confidence. At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in publishing resources that help students prepare for entrance tests, like the Ashcroft Technology Academy Wandsworth Test.
Our papers are designed to help students become familiar with the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions they may be asked on the day. Each of our practice tests should be taken under timed conditions to help develop students’ time management skills.
Below, we’ve listed our most useful resources for those preparing for the Ashcroft Technology Academy Year 6 Test. The 4 packs cover each type of question that’s known to appear in the Wandsworth Test. Each practice test includes answers:
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 4 (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within the post.
Brain Teaser: Sharpen Your Eyesight and Find the Hidden Pencil
11+
Burntwood School Year 6 Wandsworth Test: 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
Founded in 1986, Burntwood School is a girls’ secondary school in Wandsworth, London. Although principally an all-girls’ school, the sixth form does have some male students. Refurbishments to the school were completed in 2014, which saw six new buildings, including teaching pavilions, a new sports hall and performing arts buildings. In 2013, the school gained Academy status and in 2015, it won the RIBA Stirling Prize for architecture.
For an insight into what it’s like to study at Burntwood School, take a look at this short video:
Wandsworth Test Information for Burntwood School
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Burntwood School Year 6 Test
Before applying for a place at Burntwood School, parents and students are encouraged to attend an Open Day. The event provides attendees with the opportunity to view the campus and facilities and to meet current students and staff members. There will also be a guided tour of the school and a presentation from the school Principal. For more information on the open day events, parents can contact the school on 020 8946 6201 or by email at info@burntwoodschool.com.
Applications to Burntwood are made on the Secondary Transfer application form for the borough in which the student lives. Burntwood School should be listed as one of the student’s preferences. For example, students in Wandsworth should apply using the Wandsworth form, and those that live in another borough like Merton, should apply using the Merton form.
Additionally, parents need to complete a Common Application Form for the local authority in which they live. The CAF can be completed online, here. Late applications will be accepted but will only be considered after the initial offer date.
For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.
Burntwood School Year 6 Oversubscription Criteria
In cases where there are more applicants than available places at Burntwood, the school uses its oversubscription criteria to determine priority.
In the first instance, places are offered to students with a Statement of Special Educational Needs or Education Health and Care Plan. Remaining places are then allocated as follows:
78 places are allocated by general ability to students with the highest results in the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. The remaining 35 places are allocated in the following order:
- Looked After, or previously Looked-After children.
- Students with exceptional medical or social needs.
- Students who have a sibling that currently attends the school.
- Students who live closest to the school.
Burntwood School, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
Burntwood School uses the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of its admissions process. The test is designed to provide the school with an indication of each applicant’s academic ability. The test is prepared by the exam board GL Assessment and includes a non-verbal reasoning test (55 minutes long), and a verbal reasoning test (50 minutes long).
Before each test begins, students will be given a short practice section. There will also be a break between the two tests. Both papers are presented on a pre-printed answer sheet, in multiple-choice format.
Papers are marked electronically and are age-standardised. Test results are emailed to parents in October.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Practice Papers for the Burntwood School Year 6 Test
At Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources that help students prepare for competitive entry exams, like the Burntwood School Wandsworth Year 6 11 plusTest. Our papers are specifically designed to help students become familiar with the layout of competitive entry tests and the types of verbal and non-verbal reasoning questions that are used in this GL Assessment exam.
The resources listed below will be particularly useful in improving the confidence of students who are preparing for the Burntwood Year 6 Test. They cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test. Each practice test includes answers and should be taken under exam conditions.
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 4 (GL)
11+ Complete Video Guide to Verbal Reasoning
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
Reading Girls’ School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Selective Stream Test Information
11+
Established in 1818, Reading Girls’ School is a partially selective, bilateral school for girls in Reading, Berkshire. Approximately 430 girls are educated by 25 staff members. The school is known for its focus on business and enterprise. Students are encouraged to strive for excellence academically and socially and the curriculum offers a broad range of subjects and extra-curricular activities. Although not a grammar, Reading Girls’ does use an 11 Plus-style entrance test as part of its admissions process.
For a virtual tour of the school, take a look at this short video:
11 Plus Exam Information for Reading Girls’ School
Address: Reading Girls School, Northumberland Avenue, Reading, RG2 7PY
County: Reading
Admissions Info: admin@readinggirlsschool.net, 0118 986 1336
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 430 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 170 (42 by selective stream)
Open Day Date: March
Exam Date: October
Exam Board Type: CEM Select online
Reading Girls’ School 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Selective Stream Test, of which there are 42 allocated places. The school also offers entry via the Coordinated Secondary Admissions Scheme.
Admission to Reading Girls’ School in Year 7 follows the process set out by Coordinated Secondary Admissions Scheme, which is responsible for setting the school’s admissions policy. Each year, the school admits approximately 170 places, 42 of which are selected based on ability.
Students who have a Special Educational Needs or an Education, Health and Care Plan are given priority of place above other students.
In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Looked After and previously Looked After girls.
- Students who score highest in the selection test.
- Girls who have medical or social grounds for attending the school.
- Girls who have a sister who currently attends the school.
- Students who live closest to the school.
For further details about Reading Girls’ School admission process, please visit the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus (11+) Selective Entry to Reading Girls’ School
Before applying for a place at Reading Girls’ School, parents and students are encouraged to attend the school’s Open Day, which usually takes place in March. At the event, parents and students will have the opportunity to tour the school and meet current staff and students.
Once parents have visited the school and are sure that Reading Girls’ is the right establishment for their daughter, applications should be made to the appropriate Local Authority (LA), or submitted online. The application form can be downloaded here.
Students who wish to apply for one of the 42 selective places, should also complete the school’s registration form, which can be accessed here.
Reading Girls’ School Selective Stream Test (11 Plus Exam) Format
Of the 170 available places at the school, 42 are allocated to students who score the highest in the Selective Stream Test. The exam takes place in October and is administered by the exam board, CEM (University of Durham).
The test is taken online and covers the following topics:
- Verbal reasoning
- Non-verbal reasoning
- Mathematics
Your daughter must be pre-registered to take this test.
For more information on the Selective Stream Test, please visit the Selective Stream Test page on the school’s website.
How to Prepare for the Reading Girls’ School 11 Plus Exam?
A little forward planning can go a long way to helping students perform well in the Reading Girls’ School Selective Stream Test. As a starting point, we’d suggest that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents for an overview of what the test typically involves.
Once a study schedule is in place, using practice exam papers in addition to regular preparation can really help boost a student’s performance. Our practice papers help students become familiar with the layout of the exam and the types of questions that may be asked on test day. They can also help identify any weak areas that may need improvement prior to the exam.
For girls due to take the Reading Girls School Selective Stream Test, we highly recommend the following resources to help prepare in an efficient manner. The test, called CEM Select, is taken online and covers Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Reasoning. Those who have taken CEM Select in the past have told us that they found these resources extremely beneficial when preparing:
Numerical Reasoning Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM exams.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM) Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM) Pack 2
These packs contains plenty of vocabulary practice, specifically designed to match the style used in CEM exams in the ‘Word Choice’ section. There are 24 practice tests in each pack, each with 29 questions. We recommend beginning with Pack 1. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging.
11+ Verbal Reasoning – Shuffled Sentences (CEM) Pack 1
This pack focuses on a specific CEM Verbal Reasoning question type that comes up frequently. It’s relatively unusual and, in our experience, students can find it difficult to get to grips with. There are 20 tests included.
11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 1
11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 2
These packs focus on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ Reading exam. There are 15 comprehension tests included in each pack. Pack 1 focuses on classical fiction and Pack 2 focuses on non-fiction.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus Reading test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. CEM Select focuses on Matrices so these are the most relevant questions to use in this pack.
Full Practice Tests
These packs each contain two test papers covering all three topics: Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Reasoning. Using the official familiarisation material and our deep knowledge of CEM question styles and formats, we’ve created accurate and up to date CEM practice papers that pay attention to all elements including question types, timings, structure, format, question wordings, fonts and design.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
The information provided about Reading Girls’ School was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
11 Plus (CEM) – Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms and Antonyms
11+
11+ (11 plus) GL and Pretest exams – Sentence Completion – What you need to know
11+
Badminton School 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Cognitive Abilities Test (CAT)
11+
Established 1858, Badminton School is an independent, day and boarding school for girls aged 3 to 18. The school is located in Westbury-on-Trym, in Bristol and is named after Badminton House in Clifton, where it was founded. The school has a reputation for consistently performing well in secondary school league tables and in previous years has been ranked third in the Financial Times’ Top 1000 schools. The school aims to prepare its girls for living and working in a global society.
The Badminton School Cognitive Abilities Test (CAT) Information
Registration Closing Date: TBC
Exam Date: Mid–January
Exam Board Type: CAT and set by school
Results Date: End of January
Admissions Info: Badminton School
Badminton School Admissions Criteria
Badminton school encourages all prospective students to visit the school during one of its Open Days, or to arrange a private visit.
Once parents have visited the school, they can register their daughter for the assessment, which includes an online Cognitive Abilities Test. After the test has been taken, candidates are invited to a Taster Day, where they will meet other girls in their year group and experience the school environment.
The Candidate’s current school is then contacted for references and offer letters are sent out to parents shortly afterwards.
For more information on the admissions process at Badminton School, please visit the Admissions pages on the school website. Alternatively, parents can email admissions@badmintonschool.co.uk, or telephone 0117 905 5271.
How to Apply for 11 plus Entry to Badminton School
Before applying for a Year 7 Place at Badminton School, students and parents are encouraged to attend the Open Morning, which takes place in March (attendance also forms part of the school’s oversubscription criteria). At the event, girls and their parents will have the opportunity to take a tour of the school and meet staff members. Open Morning places can be booked in advance here.
After visiting the school, parents should complete the school’s online registration form and pay a registration fee of £50 for Day Girls and £150 for Boarders.
Badminton School Year 7 CAT Assessment
Year 7 entry to Badminton School is determined by student performance in an online Cognitive Abilities Test, as well as written exams in Maths and English. These assessments take place in January
As part of the admissions process, candidates are also invited to attend an interview with a senior member of staff. References are then requested from the girl’s current school.
Results are sent to parents by post or email and offer letters are sent out approximately two weeks after the assessment date. Parents are then asked to accept the offer and pay the acceptance deposit before the deadline.
How to Prepare for the Badminton School 11 plus Entrance Test
At Exam Papers Plus, we believe that a little preparation can go a long way to helping students pass their entrance exams. As the written element of the Badminton School entrance test focuses on Maths and English, we would recommend that students get acquainted with the types of questions they may face on test day. The following eleven plus practice papers will help students get used to answering similar questions and build the skills required to do well in 11 plus exams:
If your order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your total.
Online Practice for the Badminton School 11 Plus CAT Entrance Test
The Badminton assessment process also requires students to take an online CAT test. On our sister site, Pretest Plus, we have four online practice tests available that are specifically designed to help students prepare for online cognitive ability tests:
These online tests will help students familiarise themselves with the question types and formats that come up frequently in CAT tests. Once each module is complete, it will be marked automatically and students can then review each question with detailed explanations provided for each question.
The information in this post was correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Please note that Exam Papers Plus and Pretest Plus are independent publishers of practice tests and are not affiliated with or endorsed by any other test publisher.
The Wandsworth Test: Year 6, 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
11+
There are currently 5 schools that use the Wandsworth Year 6 Test as part of their 11 Plus admissions process. Some of the schools use the test exclusively, whereas others use it in conjunction with their own aptitude exams.
For detailed admissions information on each school, please read the linked posts below:
11 Plus Exam Information for Wandsworth Schools
Registration Closing Date: September (year before entry)
Common Application Form (CAF) Closing Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Results Date: October
Allocations Date: March
Appeals Hearings: June, July
Admissions Info: admissions@wandsworth.gov.uk, 020 8871 7316
How to Register for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test
Before registering for a place at any of the five schools that use the Wandsworth Test as part of their entry process, students and parents are encouraged to visit their preferred school during one of its open events. Typically, these events include a tour of the school, the opportunity to meet staff and current students, and learn more about the school’s admissions process.
Pupils who attend a state primary school in Wandsworth are automatically registered to take the Wandsworth Year 6 Test at their current school.
Parents only need to register their child if they are applying for a place at one of the five schools listed above and they attend an independent school, or a state primary school outside of Wandsworth.
Online registration forms are available from the Wandsworth Local Authority website from July, and the closing date for applications is early September. Some schools also require parents to complete a supplementary application form.
For more information on choosing a secondary school in Wandsworth, the local authority has a very useful booklet full of information about the admissions process for each school.
Wandsworth Schools, Year 6 Test, 11 Plus Exam Format
The Wandsworth Year 6 Test is designed to provide Wandsworth schools with an indication of a student’s academic ability. Students who have a statement of Special Educational Needs do not have to take the test.
The test is prepared by GL Assessment and has two parts:
- A non-verbal reasoning test, which lasts for 55 minutes.
- A verbal reasoning test, which lasts for 50 minutes.
There will be a short practice session before each test and a break between the two parts. For both sections, students are given a pre-printed answer sheet to complete, laid out in a similar format to a multiple-choice test. There is no extended writing involved.
Scores are marked electronically and are age-standardised to ensure that older students don’t have an unfair advantage. Test results are emailed to parents in October.
More information on the Wandsworth Year 6 Test is provided on the local authority website.
Practice Papers for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test
Here at Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources to help students prepare for competitive entry exams, like the Wandsworth Year 6 Test. We have a range of practice papers that are specifically designed to help students familiarise themselves with the types of Verbal and Non-Verbal Reasoning questions that are used in this GL Assessment exam.
Students currently preparing for the Wandsworth Year 6 Test will find the resources below particularly useful. They cover all the question types that are known to appear in the Wandsworth Test, so your child can approach their exam with confidence. Each practice test is timed so your child can get used to working under time pressure. Answers are included.
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning: Pack 4 (GL)
11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL-style)
The information provided about the Wandsworth Year 6 Test was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the schools directly if you are unsure of anything. Contact details are provided within individual school posts.
New practice tests specifically designed for the Buckinghamshire 11 plus exam
11+
The London Consortium 11+ (11 plus) exam will be in the CEM format.
11+
The London Consortium have released a new website with further information about their shared examination process. This information indicates that the exam will be created for them by the publishing board CEM.
The exam is therefore likely to share a number of similarities with the 11+ exam that CEM creates for numerous grammar schools across the country. This is emphasized by the fact that the official familiarisation material provided for the London Consortium exam is identical to that provided for the 11+ CEM grammar school exam.
Here at Exam Papers Plus, we specialise in producing resources that are specifically designed to help students prepare for CEM exams, like the London Consortium 11 plus test.
Whatever your child’s current attainment level, investing some additional time for preparation in the lead-up to the entrance test is likely to improve their performance ahead of the actual exam. At a minimum, being familiar with the question types, as well as the specific ways that answers must be recorded in the London Consortium 11 plus exam, will help your child approach their assessment with confidence.
As the London Consortium assessment will focus on Maths, Verbal Reasoning and Non-Verbal Reasoning, we highly recommend our selection of eleven plus papers that are designed in the CEM style for these three subjects. All our packs include answers so you can quickly check your child’s work and identify where they might need additional focus and improvement.
We would specifically recommend the following resources that can be downloaded and used immediately after purchase:
Mathematics (Numerical Reasoning) Section
11+ Short Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 20 questions. It focuses on time-pressured problem solving with question styles that are known to have been previously used by CEM.
11+ Long Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 10 tests, each consisting of 5 sections, with 5 questions in each section. It focuses on a specific type of question that comes up in CEM exams. These questions are based on some form of chart or diagram that the student must use to work out the answers. The answers must be recorded on a separate sheet in a specific manner. This pack includes separate answer sheets so students can get used to recording their responses in this way, just like they will need to do in the 11+ London Consortium test.
11+ MC Numerical Reasoning (CEM)
This pack contains 20 tests, each with 10 questions. It focuses on a different CEM question type in which there are multiple possible answer choices provided and the student must pick the correct one for each question. Separate answer sheets are provided so students can get used to recording their responses in this manner.
This pack contains 15 tests, each with 15 questions. It focuses on fundamental arithmetic skills, developing a strong basis that allows students to work through maths questions efficiently and with confidence.
Verbal Reasoning Section
Verbal Reasoning, as defined by CEM, is quite different to how it may be traditionally understood. It includes a number of question types that focus on vocabulary and comprehension as well as some more unusual formats. Each of the packs below focuses on a different skill that is assessed in the Verbal Reasoning section of CEM 11+ exams, such as the London Consortium Test.
This pack contains plenty of practice for various question types that crop up frequently in CEM exams. These include questions that assess a student’s grasp of synonyms and antonyms as well as other formats such as shuffled sentences and contextual cloze.
11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM) Pack 1
11+ Verbal Reasoning – Synonyms and Antonyms (CEM) Pack 2
These packs contain plenty of vocabulary practice, specifically designed to match the style used in CEM exams in the ‘Word Choice’ section. There are 24 practice tests in each pack, each with 29 questions. We recommend beginning with Pack 1. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging.
11+ Verbal Reasoning – Shuffled Sentences (CEM)
This pack focuses on a specific CEM Verbal Reasoning question type that comes up frequently. It’s relatively unusual and, in our experience, students can find it difficult to get to grips with. There are 20 tests included, all designed to match the exact format and style used in the actual exam. Answer sheets and answers are included.
11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 1
11+ Comprehension (CEM) Pack 2
These packs focus on multiple-choice comprehension, which will feature in the CEM 11+ London Consortium Test. There are 15 comprehension tests included in each pack. Pack 1 focuses on classical fiction and Pack 2 focuses on non-fiction.
This pack focuses on cloze questions that are used in almost all CEM 11+ exams. The pack covers three different variations, with 21 tests in total.
CEM 11+ exams, such as the 11 plus London Consortium Test, focus heavily on assessing a child’s vocabulary. These packs each introduce 200 words within context, helping students to improve both their vocabulary and spelling. This will prove useful for the Verbal Reasoning section of the exam. Pack 2 is designed to be more challenging than Pack 1.
Non-Verbal Reasoning Section
This pack covers a number of the question types that are used in CEM 11+ Non-Verbal Reasoning exams such as Matrices, Box Sequences and Exceptions. There are some extension question types as well. Whilst these are not known to be utilised in CEM exams, they will help develop your child’s Non-Verbal reasoning ability, which will stand them in good stead for the exam.
Full Practice Tests
These packs each contain two test papers covering all three topics: Verbal, Non-Verbal and Numerical Reasoning. Using the official familiarisation material and our deep knowledge of CEM question styles and formats, we’ve created accurate and up to date CEM practice papers that pay attention to all elements including question types, timings, structure, format, question wordings, fonts and design. Answers and Answer Sheets are included so your child can get used to marking their answers as they will need to do in the actual exam.
If your total order value is over £60, simply apply the code eppdiscount at checkout to get 10% off your whole order.
Please click on the links below to learn more about the admissions process at each of the schools in the London Consortium:
Notting Hill and Ealing High School
St. James Senior Girls’ School
We hope you find this article useful. Please don’t hesitate to get in touch if you need some advice or if you have any questions or queries.
Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
Grammar Schools
11+
Watford Grammar School for Boys (WGSB) is a partially selective academy located in Watford. With over 1,200 boys aged 11-18 on the school’s roll, it became a same-sex school in 1884.
Part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium, Watford Boys is one of the highest-achieving state schools in England in terms of exam results. Pupils are taught a stimulating academic curriculum and offered numerous extracurricular activities, clubs and excursions throughout the school year.
11 Plus Exam Information for Watford Grammar School for Boys
Address: Watford Grammar School for Boys, Rickmansworth Road, Watford WD18 7JF
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: dunsbyr@watfordboys.org, 01923 208900
School Type: Boys, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,265 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 224
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
To apply a Year 7 place Watford Grammar School for Boys, parents must complete the School Information Form (SIF) and the Secondary Transfer (or Common Application) Form for the local authority (LA) in which they are resident. For residents living in Hertfordshire, the LA is Hertfordshire County Council. Parents must also register their son with the South West Herts Consortium. It is essential that all forms are completed and returned no later than the closing date, as late applications will not be considered.
WGSB offers 146 community places in Year 7 and 78 specialist places. The school is heavily oversubscribed and has a clearly-defined admissions criteria.
The oversubscription criteria for community places gives priority to:
- Looked After, or previously Looked After, children
- Boys whose normal home address is nearest to the school and who would not be allocated a place under any other criterion
- Boys with a parent who is a permanent member of the school staff
- Boys with a sibling (brother) enrolled at the school
- Boys with a sibling (sister) enrolled at Watford Grammar School for Girls
- Boys who live closest to the school
The oversubscription criteria for specialist places gives priority to:
- Boys selected on the basis of aptitude for music as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
- Boys selected by academic ability as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
For more information about the full admissions process at WGBS, visit the Year 7 admissions pages on the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Watford Grammar School for Boys
To apply for a Year 7 place at WGSB, parents are advised to register their son with the South West Herts Admissions Consortium in the first instance.
Paper registration forms can be collected from any of the schools within the Consortium. Return the completed form to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
The Consortium receives a number of registrations that are invalid or ineligible. Before registering, parents are advised to thoroughly check their child’s eligibility for entry. Failure to do so may result in disappointment.
Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam Format
Watford Grammar School for Boys adheres to Hertfordshire’s Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme and as such, the academic exam consists of the following tests:
- Maths paper set by GL Assessment
- Verbal Reasoning paper set GL Assessment
The tests will each last for around 50 minutes.
The academic tests have been specially devised for the Consortium schools and no minimum score will be required to gain admission. Places are offered strictly in descending order of candidates’ standardised test scores.
How to Prepare for the Watford Grammar School for Boys 11 Plus Exam?
When it comes to the WGBS eleven plus exam, preparation is key. A small amount of regular and focused preparation can go a long way.
Parents can give their son the best chance of performing well and gaining a place at WGBS by incorporating practice papers into their study sessions. Using these papers can increase the chances of securing a Year 7 place at the school by helping students familiarise themselves with the types of questions they will be asked.
In the lead up to the exam, we’d advise students to take our practice papers under exam conditions to improve their time management skills and get them used to answering all the questions within the allocated time.
For the Watford Grammar School for Boys eleven plus exam, we would specifically recommend the following resources:
Mathematics
11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
Verbal Reasoning
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 4 (GL)
The information provided about Watford Grammar School for Boys was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus (11+) Exam – Secondary Transfer Test Information
Grammar Schools
11+
Watford Grammar School for Girls (WGGS) is an academy for girls aged 11-18. Based in Watford, it is a partially selective school, with 25% of pupils admitted on academic ability and 10% of musical aptitude.
Part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium, Watford Girls is a high-achieving school. Girls enjoy a balanced and broad academic curriculum in an effort to ensure each child achieves her own personal, academic and professional goals. Extracurricular activities play a vital role in the girls’ time at WGGS, with a variety of clubs and societies available. Year 7 students are encouraged to take part in at least three clubs per week to both broaden their interests and to make new friends.
11 Plus Exam Information for Watford Grammar School for Girls
Address: Watford Grammar School for Girls, Lady’s Close, Watford WD18 0AE
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: admin@watfordgirls.herts.sch.uk, 01923 223 403
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,266 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 210
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
To be admitted into Year 7 at Watford Grammar School for Girls, parents must send a completed Supplementary Information Form (SIF) form to the school. These forms are usually available from September. A Common Application Form (CAF) form should also be completed and returned to the Local Authority (LA), with Watford Grammar School for Girls as a named school. The CAF will also be available from September.
Parents should also register their daughter with the South West Herts Consortium. Please note that this is not an application form for a particular school, so both the SIF and CAF must be completed. Late applications will not be accepted.
WGGS has 137 community places and up to 73 specialist places available for Year 7. There are often more applications than available places, in which case, the following oversubscription criteria is used, giving priority to:
- Looked After, or previously looked after, children
- Girls whose normal home address is nearest to the school
- Girls with a parent who is a permanent member of the school staff
- Girls with a sibling (sister) enrolled at the school
- Girls with a sibling (brother) enrolled at Watford Grammar School for Boys
- Students who live closest to the school
- Girls selected on the basis of aptitude for music as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
- Girls selected by academic ability as measured by the school’s assessment procedures, in merit order
For further details about Watford Grammar School for Girls’ admission process, please visit the school’s website.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to Watford Grammar School for Girls
Once parents have completed both the SIF and CAF, they should register their child for the 11 Plus exam via the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be completed via the Consortium website, or by collecting a form from the school. Paper registrations can be returned to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
Parents should check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering, as failing to do so may result in disappointment.
Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam Format
Watford Grammar School for Girls follows the Co-ordinated Admissions Scheme for Hertfordshire.
Prospective pupils will be required to take the following exams:
- Maths paper, lasts approximately 50 minutes and is set by GL Assessment
- Verbal Reasoning paper, lasts approximately 50 minutes and is set by GL Assessment
How to Prepare for the Watford Grammar School for Girls 11 Plus Exam?
With some forward-planning and regular study sessions, students will be well prepared come exam day. A little bit of regular preparation can go a long way! We’d recommend that parents read our 11 Plus guide for parents.
Using practice exam papers as part of an 11+ study routine can really help improve a student’s performance. These papers allow children to get a better idea of the exam layout and the question types. They can also help identify any weaker areas, allowing them plenty of time to improve.
For those sitting the Watford Grammar School for Girls eleven plus exam, we highly recommend the following resources to help prepare in an efficient manner:
Mathematics
11+ Maths: Problem Solving (GL)
Verbal Reasoning
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 1 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 2 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 3 (GL)
11+ Verbal Reasoning Pack 4 (GL)
The information provided about Watford Grammar School for Girls was believed to be correct at the time of publishing. However, please be aware of future changes. We advise you to contact the school directly if you are unsure of anything. School contact details are provided within the post.
St Clement Danes School 11 Plus (11+) Exam Information
Grammar Schools
11+
Founded in 1862, St Clement Danes School is a co-educational, partially selective academy based in the Hertfordshire village of Chorleywood. Rated as ‘Outstanding’ by Ofsted, the school educates over 1,300 pupils aged between 11 and 18. St Clement Danes is part of the South West Herts Grammar School Consortium and offers a varied curriculum and broad extra-curricular timetable.
The school is committed to a high quality pastoral care programme and also has an active wellbeing programme, focusing on building students’ resilience and mental strength.
11 Plus Exam Information for St Clement Danes School
Address: St Clement Danes School, Chenies Road, Chorleywood, WD3 6EW
County: Hertfordshire
Admissions Info: admissions@stclementdanes.herts.sch.uk, 01923 284169
School Type: Co-educational, partially selective
Number of pupils: 1,336 (approx.)
Number of Places in Year 7: 240
Open Day Date: October
Exam Date: September
Exam Board Type: GL Assessment
St Clement Danes School 11 Plus Admissions
This article is relevant for those aiming for entry to the school based on the Academic Criterion. The school also offers an entry point via the Music criterion, which is not discussed here.
Admission to St Clement Danes School is handled through the Secondary Transfer process. To apply for a Year 7 place, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be done online and once completed, parents can view all exam dates and locations.
St Clement Danes is a popular school and is usually oversubscribed at Year 7. In cases where there are more applicants than available places, the school uses the following oversubscription criteria, giving priority to:
- Children in public care
- Children with a sibling attending the school
- Children of school staff
- Distance from home to school
For a full explanation of the school’s oversubscription criteria, please consult the admissions policy.
How to Apply for 11 Plus Entry to St Clement Danes School
To apply for 11+ entry to St Clement Danes School, parents must register their child with the South West Herts Schools Consortium. Registration can be done online at any time during the registration period. Late registrations will not be accepted under any circumstances.
Paper registration forms can be collected from any of the schools within the Consortium and returned to:
South West Herts School Tests
PO Box 2439
Watford
WD18 1UZ
Parents should always check their child’s eligibility for entry before registering in order to avoid disappointment.